{"title":"Workshop equipment","description":null,"products":[{"product_id":"hochhubwagen-manuell-1-6-meter","title":"Manual stacker 1.6 m – 1000 kg load capacity","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eManual stacker 1.6 meters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003emanual stacker with a 1.6-meter lift height\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a load capacity of up to \u003cstrong\u003e1000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for lifting and transporting loads. With a lift range of 90 to 1600 mm and a fork length of 1150 mm, it is designed for in-house material transport.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStacker with 1000 kg load capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe stacker has a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 1000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The forks can be raised from 90 mm to a maximum lift height of \u003cstrong\u003e1600 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows loads to be lifted and positioned at various heights.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.6-meter lift height:\u003c\/strong\u003e The lift range extends from 90 to 1600 mm. The height of the stacker is 2080 mm.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1150 mm long forks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and an external width of 550 mm. The turning radius is 1380 mm. With a width of 755 mm and a depth of 1705 mm, the stacker offers compact dimensions for its area of application.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1000 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1.6 m maximum lift height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eLift range from \u003cstrong\u003e90 to 1600 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1150 mm fork length\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eExternal fork width: \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTurning radius: \u003cstrong\u003e1380 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eHeight: \u003cstrong\u003e2080 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWidth: \u003cstrong\u003e755 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDead weight: \u003cstrong\u003e210 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1000 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLift range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e90–1600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eExternal fork width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eExtended height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2080 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e755 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1705 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eEmpty weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e210 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact overview\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum load capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1000 kg\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum lift height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1600 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFork length:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1150 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExternal fork width:\u003c\/strong\u003e 550 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWidth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 755 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurning radius:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1380 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEmpty weight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 210 kg\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the stacker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can the stacker carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe manual stacker has a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 1000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the stacker lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stacker reaches a maximum lift height of \u003cstrong\u003e1600 mm or 1.6 meters\u003c\/strong\u003e. The lift range starts at 90 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The external width of the forks is 550 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the stacker?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stacker is \u003cstrong\u003e755 mm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e and 1705 mm deep. The height is 2080 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the stacker weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe empty weight of the stacker is \u003cstrong\u003e210 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Gewicht kann der Hochhubwagen tragen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der manuelle Hochhubwagen hat eine Tragfähigkeit von 1000 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch kann der Hochhubwagen heben?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Hochhubwagen erreicht eine maximale Hubhöhe von 1600 mm bzw. 1,6 Metern. Der Hubbereich beginnt bei 90 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lang sind die Gabeln?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Gabeln haben eine Länge von 1150 mm. Der Aussenabstand der Gabeln beträgt 550 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Hochhubwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Hochhubwagen ist 755 mm breit und 1705 mm tief. Die Höhe beträgt 2080 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel wiegt der Hochhubwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Leergewicht des Hochhubwagens beträgt 210 kg.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155210621275,"sku":"9.244","price":1249.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Hochhubwagen-manuell-1.6-Meter.jpg?v=1790087625"},{"product_id":"hochhubwagen-manuell-2-5-meter","title":"Manual stacker 2.5 m – 1000 kg load capacity","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eManual stacker 2.5 meters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003emanual stacker with a 2.5-meter lift height\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a load capacity of up to \u003cstrong\u003e1000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for lifting and transporting loads. With a lift range of 90 to 2500 mm and a fork length of 1150 mm, it is designed for various requirements in internal material handling.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStacker with 1000 kg load capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe stacker has a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 1000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The forks can be raised from 90 mm up to a maximum lift height of \u003cstrong\u003e2500 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows loads to be brought to different heights and positioned for further storage, for example.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2.5 meter lift height:\u003c\/strong\u003e The lift range is from 90 to 2500 mm. The maximum height of the extended stacker is 2925 mm.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFork length and dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003e1150 mm long forks\u003c\/strong\u003e have an outer spacing of 580 mm. With a width of 860 mm, a depth of 1655 mm, and a height of 1840 mm, the stacker offers defined dimensions for operation and storage.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1000 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2.5 m maximum lift height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eLift range of \u003cstrong\u003e90 to 2500 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1150 mm fork length\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOuter fork spacing: \u003cstrong\u003e580 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTurning radius: \u003cstrong\u003e1380 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eHeight extended: \u003cstrong\u003e2925 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDead weight: \u003cstrong\u003e286 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1000 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLift range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e90–2500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOuter fork spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e580 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight extended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2925 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1840 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e860 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1655 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDead weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e286 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact overview\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum load:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1000 kg\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum lift height:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2500 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFork length:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1150 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWidth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 860 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurning radius:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1380 mm\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDead weight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 286 kg\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the stacker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can the stacker carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe manual stacker has a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 1000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the stacker lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stacker reaches a maximum lift height of \u003cstrong\u003e2500 mm or 2.5 meters\u003c\/strong\u003e. The lift range starts at 90 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The outer spacing of the forks is 580 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the stacker?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stacker is 860 mm wide, 1655 mm deep, and 1840 mm high. When extended, the height is 2925 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the stacker weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dead weight of the stacker is \u003cstrong\u003e286 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Gewicht kann der Hochhubwagen tragen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der manuelle Hochhubwagen hat eine Tragfähigkeit von 1000 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch kann der Hochhubwagen heben?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Hochhubwagen erreicht eine maximale Hubhöhe von 2500 mm bzw. 2,5 Metern. Der Hubbereich beginnt bei 90 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lang sind die Gabeln?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Gabeln haben eine Länge von 1150 mm. Der Aussenabstand der Gabeln beträgt 580 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Hochhubwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Hochhubwagen ist 860 mm breit, 1655 mm tief und 1840 mm hoch. Ausgefahren beträgt die Höhe 2925 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel wiegt der Hochhubwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Leergewicht des Hochhubwagens beträgt 286 kg.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155218387291,"sku":"9.245","price":1659.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Hochhubwagen-manuell-2.5-Meter.jpg?v=1790087630"},{"product_id":"schneehexe-mini-glanzverzinkt","title":"Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized – snow removal tool","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSnow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized – compact snow clearing solution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eSnow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact solution for snow clearing. The bright-galvanized version combines the proven compact dimensions of the Mini model with a bright-galvanized surface finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSnow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a width of \u003cstrong\u003e670 or 530 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of 150 mm, the Snow Scoop Mini boasts compact dimensions. Weighing only \u003cstrong\u003e5.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is also easy to handle and transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBright-galvanized finish:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThis version of the Snow Scoop Mini features a \u003cstrong\u003ebright-galvanized\u003c\/strong\u003e finish. This distinguishes it from the version with a snow-repellent coating.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions and low weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWidth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 670 \/ 530 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e only 5.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e bright-galvanized\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 \/ 530 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebright-galvanized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy the Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized online at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eSnow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a compact design for snow clearing. With a width of 670 or 530 mm, a height of 150 mm, and a weight of 5.5 kg, it is easy to handle and transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe bright-galvanized Snow Scoop Mini is a compact option for users looking for a snow clearing solution with a bright-galvanized finish.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized is a compact \u003cstrong\u003esnow clearing solution\u003c\/strong\u003e with a bright-galvanized finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow wide is the Snow Scoop Mini?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Snow Scoop Mini is specified as having a width of \u003cstrong\u003e670 or 530 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the Snow Scoop Mini?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified height is \u003cstrong\u003e150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bright-galvanized Snow Scoop Mini weighs \u003cstrong\u003e5.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIn which finish is the Snow Scoop Mini available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis version of the Snow Scoop Mini features a \u003cstrong\u003ebright-galvanized\u003c\/strong\u003e finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized is a compact snow clearing solution in a bright-galvanized finish.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How wide is the Snow Scoop Mini?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Snow Scoop Mini is specified as having a width of 670 or 530 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How high is the Snow Scoop Mini?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The specified height is 150 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How much does the Snow Scoop Mini bright-galvanized weigh?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The bright-galvanized Snow Scoop Mini weighs 5.5 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"In which finish is the Snow Scoop Mini available?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This version of the Snow Scoop Mini features a bright-galvanized finish.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155248042331,"sku":"9.251","price":99.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Schneehexe-glanzverzinkt-Mini.jpg?v=1790087659"},{"product_id":"schneehexe-mini-mit-schneeabweisendem-belag","title":"Snow Scoop Mini with snow-repellent coating","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSnow Scoop Mini with snow-repellent coating\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eSnow Scoop Mini\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact solution for snow removal. The \u003cstrong\u003esnow-repellent coating\u003c\/strong\u003e supports easy operation in winter conditions and prevents snow from unnecessarily sticking to the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSnow Scoop Mini for snow removal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a width of \u003cstrong\u003e670 mm or 530 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Snow Scoop Mini offers compact dimensions for snow removal. Its low weight of only \u003cstrong\u003e5.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e makes it relatively easy to handle and transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSnow-repellent coating:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe special snow-repellent coating is a key feature of the Snow Scoop Mini and supports easy handling when clearing snow.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions and low weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWidth:\u003c\/strong\u003e 670 \/ 530 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e only 5.7 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSnow-repellent coating\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 \/ 530 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy the Snow Scoop Mini online at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eSnow Scoop Mini with snow-repellent coating\u003c\/strong\u003e combines compact dimensions with a low weight. With a width of 670 or 530 mm and a weight of 5.7 kg, it is designed for uncomplicated handling during snow removal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe snow-repellent coating makes the Snow Scoop Mini particularly interesting for users who value the simplest possible handling when clearing snow.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Snow Scoop Mini\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cdetails open=\"\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the Snow Scoop Mini?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Snow Scoop Mini is a compact tool for \u003cstrong\u003esnow removal\u003c\/strong\u003e with a snow-repellent coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow wide is the Snow Scoop Mini?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Snow Scoop Mini is specified with a width of \u003cstrong\u003e670 or 530 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the Snow Scoop Mini?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified height is \u003cstrong\u003e150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the Snow Scoop Mini weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Snow Scoop Mini weighs \u003cstrong\u003e5.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is special about the coating?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Snow Scoop Mini features a \u003cstrong\u003esnow-repellent coating\u003c\/strong\u003e that reduces the adhesion of snow to the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the Snow Scoop Mini?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Snow Scoop Mini is a compact tool for snow removal with a snow-repellent coating.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How wide is the Snow Scoop Mini?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Snow Scoop Mini is specified with a width of 670 or 530 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How high is the Snow Scoop Mini?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The specified height is 150 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How much does the Snow Scoop Mini weigh?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Snow Scoop Mini weighs 5.7 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is special about the coating?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Snow Scoop Mini features a snow-repellent coating that reduces the adhesion of snow to the surface.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155255939419,"sku":"9.253","price":115.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Schneehexe-oranger-schneeabweisender-Belag-Mini.jpg?v=1790087670"},{"product_id":"maurer-werkzeugkiste","title":"Mason's tool box, 570 × 300 x 420 mm, 10 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMason's Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePractical tool box for masons, construction workers, and use on the job site\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003emason's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a practical way to store tools and work utensils clearly in one place. With dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 300 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of \u003cstrong\u003e420 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is suitable for use in the construction industry, particularly for masonry work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWell-organized tool storage makes daily work on the construction site easier. Instead of transporting individual tools loosely, the necessary work utensils can be kept together in a dedicated \u003cstrong\u003emason's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e and taken to the respective work site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor job site use:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe mason's tool box is designed for the practical and organized storage of tools and work utensils, making it suitable for daily use in the construction trade.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the mason's tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpecifically for the construction site:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suitable for masonry work and other activities in the construction industry.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical tool storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tools and work utensils can be transported and stored together.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact dimensions:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a footprint of 570 × 300 mm and a height of 420 mm, the box is a practical size for everyday work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 kg dead weight:\u003c\/strong\u003e The weight should be taken into account when transporting and handling the tool box.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional use:\u003c\/strong\u003e A suitable storage solution for tradespeople and use on the construction site.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for masons and construction work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eNumerous tools and aids are used on construction sites every day. A suitable \u003cstrong\u003emason's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e helps to keep the required work utensils bundled together for storage and transport to the work site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eCentralized tool storage is particularly practical when working at changing locations. The box can be used to store the tools needed for each task, thereby supporting a structured organization of the workspace.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor daily use on the construction site\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe mason's tool box is of interest to tradespeople who want to use their equipment in an organized manner on the construction site. With dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 300 × 420 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, it provides a clearly defined storage size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractically organized:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nA separate tool box ensures that work utensils do not have to be transported loosely and facilitates the organization of tools at the respective place of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's tool box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e570 × 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e420 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eUsage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMasonry work\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStorage and transport of tools for daily work tasks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction site\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePractical organization of tools and work utensils at the site.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction industry\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for tradespeople who want to store their equipment bundled together.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshop\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFor clear storage of tools and required work utensils.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDimensions and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe mason's tool box has a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 300 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and is \u003cstrong\u003e420 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e. The dead weight is \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. These specifications should be taken into account when planning transport and the intended place of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the mason's tool box suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is aimed particularly at \u003cstrong\u003emasons, construction workers, and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e who are looking for a practical solution for storing and transporting their work equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is suitable both for use directly on the construction site and for the organized storage of tools in a workshop or workspace.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nMasons, construction tradespeople, job site personnel, and craftsmen who want to store their tools in a clear and bundled manner.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the mason's tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the mason's tool box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe mason's tool box is particularly suitable for masons, construction workers, and other tradespeople who want to store and transport their tools and work utensils in an organized manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the mason's tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe mason's tool box has a size of 570 × 300 mm and a height of 420 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the mason's tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the mason's tool box is 10 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used on the construction site?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The mason's tool box is intended for the storage and transport of tools and work utensils in the construction and building trade sector.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is a mason's tool box used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA mason's tool box is used to store tools and work utensils bundled together and to transport them to the respective place of work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box also suitable for other tradespeople?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box can generally be of interest to other tradespeople who want to store and transport their work equipment in an organized manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy the mason's tool box at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003emason's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical storage solution for use in the construction industry. With dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 300 × 420 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers a clearly defined size for tool organization on the construction site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eStructured tool storage supports an efficient workflow and facilitates the transport of the required equipment between the warehouse, workshop, and construction site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor professional everyday work:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe mason's tool box is suitable for tradespeople who value centralized and clear storage of their tools and work utensils.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen eignet sich die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Maurer, Bauarbeiter und andere Handwerker, die ihre Werkzeuge und Arbeitsutensilien geordnet aufbewahren und transportieren möchten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 570 × 300 mm und eine Höhe von 420 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Maurer-Werkzeugkiste beträgt 10 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste auf der Baustelle eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste ist für die Aufbewahrung und den Transport von Werkzeug und Arbeitsutensilien im Baustellen- und Bauhandwerksbereich vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird eine Maurer-Werkzeugkiste verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Eine Maurer-Werkzeugkiste dient dazu, Werkzeuge und Arbeitsutensilien gebündelt aufzubewahren und zum jeweiligen Arbeitsort zu transportieren.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste auch für andere Handwerker geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste kann grundsätzlich auch für andere Handwerker interessant sein, die ihre Arbeitsmittel geordnet aufbewahren und transportieren möchten.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155276222811,"sku":"9.259","price":239.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Mauerer-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087704"},{"product_id":"maurer-werkzeugkiste-easy","title":"Mason's Toolbox Easy – 27-piece mason's tool set","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eComplete set of tools for masonry work, plastering, and the construction site\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e offers an extensive basic set of equipment for masons, construction workers, tradespeople, and renovators. The collection includes essential tools for \u003cstrong\u003emasonry, plastering, aligning, measuring, marking, and processing\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it ideal for daily use on the construction site.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFrom various masonry trowels and smoothing tools to a spirit level, square, hammer, pliers, chisels, lines, and brushes, the most important aids are clearly organized within one toolbox.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical complete set:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe Easy Masonry Toolbox combines an extensive selection of masonry and construction tools in one compact set. With a total weight of 16 kg and dimensions of 650 × 310 × 340 mm, it is particularly suitable for organized use on the construction site.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe advantages of the Easy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensive masonry equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e for typical work on the construction site.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVarious trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e for masonry, plastering, and smoothing work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMeasuring and alignment tools\u003c\/strong\u003e such as a spirit level, masonry square, and folding rule.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMarking tools\u003c\/strong\u003e including masonry line, chalk line, and carpenter's pencil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHammer and striking tools\u003c\/strong\u003e for various construction tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical additions\u003c\/strong\u003e such as pliers, brushes, sponge, utility knife, and padlock.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSafety goggles with case\u003c\/strong\u003e included for additional eye protection during appropriate tasks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMasonry tools for versatile construction work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFunctional tool equipment is crucial for masonry and renovation work. The \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e combines classic tools for applying, spreading, and smoothing mortar and plaster with devices for measuring, aligning, and marking.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis makes the set suitable for a variety of tasks involving masonry, plastering, interior finishing, and renovation. The included tools cover both delicate work and more robust activities on the construction site.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTrowels and smoothing tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nSeveral different trowels are available for masonry and plastering work. The selection is complemented by a steel smoothing trowel, a wooden rubbing float, and large wooden floats.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMasonry trowel, square, import – blade length 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBerner plastering trowel, import – blade length 140 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBerlin trowel, classic – blade length 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePointing trowel (cat's tongue), import – blade length 140 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSteel smoothing trowel – blade size 280 × 150 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRubbing float, pointed, wood – size 280 × 150 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWooden float, large, wood – size 500 × 320 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpirit level, square, and measuring tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe toolbox contains several important measuring and alignment tools for precise leveling and measurement. These include a \u003cstrong\u003e600 mm long aluminum spirit level\u003c\/strong\u003e, a masonry and locksmith's square, and a 2 m folding rule from Stabila.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions \/ Design\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAluminum spirit level, Alpha yellow\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm\u003cbr\u003eProfile 48 × 22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMasonry and locksmith's square\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 500 mm\u003cbr\u003eWidth 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections\u003cbr\u003eLength 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLines and marking tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nVarious lines and marking tools are included for tracing, aligning, and transferring lines. The \u003cstrong\u003e30 m chalk line with chalk powder\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly practical for longer markings.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlumb lines, nylon – length 50 m, Ø 1 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlumb bobs – weight 400 g\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWire twister, Basler model – handle 90 mm, length 390 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMasonry line – length 100 m, Ø 2 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eChalk line with powder – length 30 m, Ø 1 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCarpenter's pencil, import – length 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor precise work:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe spirit level, square, folding rule, lines, plumb bobs, and chalk line enable measurement, alignment, and marking for various construction and renovation projects.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHammer, chisels, and other hand tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor more robust tasks, the \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e contains various striking and hand tools. These include a stonemason's hammer, a roofing hammer, as well as a cold chisel and a point chisel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eStonemason's hammer, import – head weight 1000 g, handle length 28 cm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCold chisel, import – length 300 mm, Ø 18 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePoint chisel, import – length 300 mm, Ø 18 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRoofing hammer with fiberglass handle – head weight 600 g, handle length 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTower pincers – length 220 mm, basic design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBrushes, sponge, and practical helpers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to classic masonry tools, the toolbox contains various aids for auxiliary tasks and cleaning. These include a masonry sponge, a sweeping brush, and a ceiling brush.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMasonry sponge – size 170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSweeping brush, union – length 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCeiling brush – dimensions 150 × 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUtility knife with blade locking wheel – length 18 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCylinder padlock – size 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications of the Easy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e650 × 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eWeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e16 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eComplete scope of delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe following overview shows all tools contained in the \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e and their respective dimensions or designs.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eIncluded tool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDesign \/ Dimension\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMasonry trowel, square, import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBerner plastering trowel, import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBerlin trowel, classic\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePointing trowel (cat's tongue), import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSteel smoothing trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade size 280 × 150 mm\u003cbr\u003eBlade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRubbing float, pointed, wood\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 280 × 150 mm\u003cbr\u003eThickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWooden float, large, wood\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 500 × 320 mm\u003cbr\u003eThickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlumb lines, nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 50 m\u003cbr\u003eØ 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlumb bobs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight 400 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWire twister, Basler model\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle 90 mm\u003cbr\u003eLength 390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAluminum spirit level, Alpha yellow\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm\u003cbr\u003eProfile 48 × 22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMasonry and locksmith's square\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 500 mm\u003cbr\u003eWidth 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStonemason's hammer, import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead weight 1000 g\u003cbr\u003eHandle length 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTower pincers\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 220 mm\u003cbr\u003eBasic design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMasonry line\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 100 m\u003cbr\u003eØ 2 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCold chisel, import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm\u003cbr\u003eØ 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePoint chisel, import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm\u003cbr\u003eØ 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMasonry sponge\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSweeping brush, union\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCeiling brush\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions 150 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUtility knife with blade locking wheel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCarpenter's pencil, import\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections\u003cbr\u003eLength 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChalk line with powder\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 30 m\u003cbr\u003eØ 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoofing hammer with fiberglass handle\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead weight 600 g\u003cbr\u003eHandle length 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSafety goggles incl. case\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluding case\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Easy Masonry Toolbox suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n \u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e is aimed at users who require a wide range of tool equipment for construction, renovation, and masonry work. It is particularly suitable for use on construction sites as well as for masonry, plastering, and interior finishing work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMasons and construction workers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRenovation and refurbishment work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlastering and interior finishing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eConstruction site use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCraft work around the house and building\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Easy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the Easy Masonry Toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Easy Masonry Toolbox is an extensive collection of essential tools for masonry, plastering, measuring, aligning, and construction work. It combines various trowels with measuring tools, striking tools, and practical accessories.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many tools are included in the Easy Masonry Toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe set includes 27 listed tools and accessories, including various trowels, measuring and marking tools, hammers, striking tools, brushes, and safety goggles.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large and heavy is the toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Easy Masonry Toolbox is 650 × 310 mm in size, 340 mm high, and weighs 16 kg.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIncluded are a square masonry trowel, a Berner plastering trowel, a Berlin trowel, and a pointing trowel. A steel smoothing trowel is also part of the equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a spirit level included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. The equipment includes an Alpha yellow aluminum spirit level with a length of 600 mm and a profile of 48 × 22 mm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich measuring tools are included in the delivery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe scope of delivery includes an aluminum spirit level, a masonry and locksmith's square, a wooden folding rule, and a chalk line with chalk powder.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre a hammer and striking tools included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. The toolbox contains a stonemason's hammer, a roofing hammer with a fiberglass handle, as well as a cold chisel and a point chisel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre safety goggles included in the delivery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nYes. Safety goggles including a case are part of the scope of delivery.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat work is the toolbox suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe collection is suitable for masonry, plastering, renovation, interior finishing, measuring, alignment, and marking work, as well as various activities on the construction site.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy the Easy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith the \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Masonry Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e, masons and tradespeople receive a versatile basic set of equipment for numerous construction site tasks. The combination of trowels, smoothing tools, measuring and marking tools, hammers, striking tools, and practical accessories makes the toolbox a comprehensive solution for masonry and renovation work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEverything important within reach:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe Easy Masonry Toolbox bundles the most important tools for masonry work into one clearly organized set, making it ideal as basic equipment for the construction site, renovation, and professional trade.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste Easy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste Easy ist eine umfangreiche Zusammenstellung wichtiger Werkzeuge für Maurer-, Putz-, Mess-, Richt- und Bauarbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Werkzeuge sind in der Maurer-Werkzeugkiste Easy enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ausstattung umfasst 27 aufgeführte Werkzeuge und Zubehörteile, darunter verschiedene Kellen, Mess- und Markierwerkzeuge, Hammer, Schlagwerkzeuge, Bürsten und eine Schutzbrille.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross und schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Maurer-Werkzeugkiste Easy hat eine Grösse von 650 × 310 mm, ist 340 mm hoch und wiegt 16 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Kellen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind eine kantige Maurerkelle, eine Berner Putzkelle, eine Berliner Kelle und eine Katzenzunge. Zusätzlich gehört eine Glättekelle aus Stahl zur Ausstattung.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Wasserwaage enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zur Ausstattung gehört eine Alu-Wasserwaage Alpha gelb mit 600 mm Länge und einem Profil von 48 × 22 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Hammer und Schlagwerkzeuge enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste enthält einen Handfäustel, einen Latthammer mit Fiberglassstiel sowie ein Schlageisen und ein Spitzeisen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Schutzbrille im Lieferumfang enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Eine Schutzbrille inklusive Etui gehört zum Lieferumfang.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Zusammenstellung eignet sich für Maurer-, Putz-, Renovierungs-, Ausbau-, Mess-, Richt- und Markierarbeiten sowie für verschiedene Tätigkeiten auf der Baustelle.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155279368539,"sku":"9.260","price":389.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Maurer-Werkzeugkiste-Easy.jpg?v=1790087709"},{"product_id":"pflaesterer-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Paving tool box Steinemann | Tool set","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensively equipped tool chest for paviors and demanding construction work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/strong\u003e contains an extensive selection of tools for paving, stone working, and general construction site tasks. With a size of \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of 420 mm, and a weight of 29 kg, it offers a comprehensive range of tools for practical use.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpecially for paving work:\u003c\/strong\u003e The equipment includes, among other things, a paving hammer, club hammer, boucharde hammer, point chisel, flat chisel, carbide tools, stone-dressing chisel, granite chisel, trowels, as well as various measuring and marking tools.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool equipment for paviors\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/strong\u003e is tailored to typical tasks involved in paving and stone working. The combination of striking tools, chisels, setters, and hand tools allows for versatile equipment suitable for various work steps.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe set includes, among other things, a \u003cstrong\u003epaving hammer with a 1250 g head weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, a club hammer of 1250 g, and a boucharde hammer of 1000 g. The equipment is complemented by various point chisels, flat chisels, and carbide tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for stone working and paving\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor working and setting stones, the tool chest contains several specifically suited tools. These include \u003cstrong\u003egranite chisels, carbide setters, carbide point chisels, and a stone-dressing chisel\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe pavior’s stool with a 280 mm diameter and 300 mm height also supports tasks that require a low working position.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHammers and striking tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePaving hammer\u003c\/strong\u003e with 1250 g head weight and 30 cm handle length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eClub hammer with 1250 g head weight and 28 cm handle length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eBoucharde hammer with 1000 g head weight and 28 cm handle length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eRubber mallet with 140 × 90 mm head\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eNylon hammer model KH with 70 mm head diameter and 30 cm handle length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMeasuring, marking, and surveying tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor measuring, alignment, and marking work, the tool chest is equipped with various measuring and auxiliary tools. These include a \u003cstrong\u003e50 m fiberglass frame tape measure\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 2 m folding rule, a 100 m chalk line, a chalk line reel, as well as marking chalk and a chalk holder.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFiberglass frame tape measure, 50 m, band width 15 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eNylon chalk line, 100 m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWooden folding rule by Stabila, 2 m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eChalk line reel with powder, 30 m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMarking chalk in blue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eChalk holder for 10 mm diameter chalk\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAsphalt spirit level A5, 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMasonry and locksmith's square, 600 × 280 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTrowels, brushes, and other hand tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to the specialized paving and stone working tools, the set includes various classic hand tools. These include \u003cstrong\u003emason's trowel, Berner plastering trowel, pointing trowel, jointing trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e, and other aids for construction site work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDesign \/ Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCarrying strap for tool chest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1000 × 30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eClub hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 1250 g, handle length 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBoucharde hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 1000 g, handle length 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePaving hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 1250 g, handle length 30 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePoint chisel, Muller Carbone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm, Ø 16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFlat chisel, Muller Carbone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm, Ø 16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAsphalt spirit level A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMasonry and locksmith's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, width 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eUnion scrubbing brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSafety glasses incl. case\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePincers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's trowel, square, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBerner plastering trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePointing trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eNylon chalk line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 100 m, Ø 2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFiberglass frame tape measure, Grip Frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 50 m, band width 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eGranite chisel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWidth 40 mm, length 225 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTar spatula (paint scraper)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade width 50 mm, thickness 1.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eStonemason's pencil, Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 sections, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMarking chalk (forestry chalk), blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eChalk holder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFor chalk Ø 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eUtility knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBand hearing protection, Flexband\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eVersion SNR 24\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePavior’s stool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eØ 280 mm, height 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWall brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e175 × 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eKnee pads, plastic, box-shaped\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eJointing trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade width 8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eChalk line reel with powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 30 m, Ø 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCarbide setter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWidth 40 mm, length 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eStone-dressing chisel (setter)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e40 × 18 mm, length 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCarbide point chisel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 220 mm, Ø 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eRubber mallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead 140 × 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eNylon hammer model KH\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead Ø 70 mm, handle length 30 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eName\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e650 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e420 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e29 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTool equipment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eExtensive tool set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor paviors, stone working, and construction sites\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/strong\u003e is intended for paviors and tradespeople who require an extensive range of tools for their daily work. In addition to specialized stone-working tools, numerous general hand tools are also included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePaving hammer, club hammer, and boucharde hammer\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePoint chisel, flat chisel, and carbide tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eGranite chisel and stone-dressing chisel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMultiple mason's and plastering trowels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e600 mm spirit level and 600 mm mason's square\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e50 m fiberglass frame tape measure\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e100 m chalk line and 30 m chalk line reel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePavior’s stool for low-position work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSafety glasses, hearing protection, and knee pads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCarrying strap for the tool chest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Paviors' Tool Chest suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool chest is particularly suitable for paviors and tradespeople for paving, stone working, and various construction site tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tools are included in the tool chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes, among other things, a paving hammer, club hammer, boucharde hammer, point chisel, flat chisel, carbide tools, trowels, measuring and marking tools, and other craft accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Paviors' Tool Chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool chest has a size of 650 × 330 mm and is 420 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the Paviors' Tool Chest is 29 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a paving hammer included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scope of delivery includes a paving hammer with a 1250 g head weight and 30 cm handle length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre tools for stone working included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Included are, among other things, granite chisels, carbide setters, carbide point chisels, and a stone-dressing chisel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a pavior’s stool included in the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The pavior’s stool has a diameter of 280 mm and a height of 300 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre measuring and marking tools included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes, among other things, a 50 m fiberglass frame tape measure, a 100 m chalk line, a 30 m chalk line reel, marking chalk, a chalk holder, and a 2 m folding rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs safety equipment included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scope of delivery includes safety glasses including a case, band hearing protection with SNR 24, and plastic knee pads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a carrying strap for the tool chest included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scope of delivery includes a carrying strap for the tool chest with a size of 1000 × 30 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Pflästerer Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Pflästerer und Handwerker für Pflästerarbeiten, Steinbearbeitung und verschiedene Arbeiten auf der Baustelle.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind in der Werkzeugkiste enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält unter anderem Pflästererhammer, Handfäustel, Bossierhammer, Spitzeisen, Schlageisen, Hartmetallwerkzeuge, Kellen, Mess- und Markierwerkzeuge sowie weiteres Handwerkszubehör.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Pflästerer Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 650 × 330 mm und ist 420 mm hoch.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Pflästerer Werkzeugkiste beträgt 29 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Pflästererhammer enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehört ein Pflästererhammer mit 1250 g Kopfgewicht und 30 cm Stiellänge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Werkzeuge für die Steinbearbeitung enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Enthalten sind unter anderem Graniteisen, Hartmetall-Setzer, Hartmetall-Spitzeisen und ein Steinrichtmeissel.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Pflästererhocker im Set enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Pflästererhocker hat einen Durchmesser von 280 mm und eine Höhe von 300 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Mess- und Markierwerkzeuge enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Set enthält unter anderem ein 50 m Glasfaser-Rahmenbandmass, eine 100 m Trassierschnur, ein 30 m Schlagschnurgerät, Signierkreide, einen Kreidenhalter und einen 2 m Gliedermeter.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist Schutzausrüstung enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehören eine Schutzbrille inklusive Etui, ein Bügelgehörschutz mit SNR 24 und Kunststoff-Knieschoner.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Tragriemen für die Werkzeugkiste enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehört ein Tragriemen für den Werkzeugkasten mit einer Grösse von 1000 × 30 mm.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Steinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Paviors' Tool Chest\u003c\/strong\u003e combines an extensive selection of tools for paving and stone working with essential measuring, marking, and hand tools. With a \u003cstrong\u003esize of 650 × 330 mm, a height of 420 mm, and a weight of 29 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is designed for practical use in the paving trade and on construction sites.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e For paving work, a combination of suitable striking and chiseling tools, measuring tools, and trowels is particularly practical. This set brings these tool groups together in equipment tailored to paviors.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155301683547,"sku":"9.263","price":899.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Pfl_C3_A4sterer-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann.jpg?v=1790087726"},{"product_id":"gartenbauer-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Landscaper Tool Chest Steinemann | Tool Set","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensively equipped tool box for landscaping and trade use\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e contains an extensive selection of tools for landscaping work, construction sites, and general trade tasks. The box measures \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, is 420 mm high, and weighs 24 kg.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComplete tool set for landscapers:\u003c\/strong\u003e The equipment includes, among other things, club hammers and mallets, chisels, trowels, planting trowels, measuring and marking tools, screwdrivers, wrenches, a spirit level, as well as personal protective equipment.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool equipment for landscapers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e is tailored to typical work in landscaping and trade activities. The combination of measuring, marking, striking, masonry, and hand tools provides a versatile basic set for various work steps.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe scope of delivery includes, among other items, a \u003cstrong\u003eclub hammer with a 1000 g head weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, point chisels and flat chisels from Muller Carbone, various masonry trowels, a 600 mm spirit level, a mason's and fitter's square, and planting trowels.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMeasuring, marking, and surveying tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe set contains various practical aids for measuring, marking, and alignment work. These include a \u003cstrong\u003e30 m steel frame tape measure\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 2 m folding rule, chalk line, marking string, plumb bob, as well as marking chalk with a matching chalk holder.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSteel frame tape measure with \u003cstrong\u003e30 m length\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eNylon marking string, 100 m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eChalk line, 20 m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlumb bob, 400 g weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStabila wooden folding rule, 2 m\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMarking chalk in red\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eChalk holder for 10 mm diameter chalk\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAsphalt spirit level A5, 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHammers, chisels, and striking tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor various landscaping and construction site tasks, the tool box is equipped with several striking and chiseling tools. These include a \u003cstrong\u003eclub hammer, shaping hammer, and mason's hammer\u003c\/strong\u003e, as well as point chisels, flat chisels, and a stone setting chisel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTrowels and tools for masonry and plastering work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool equipment includes several trowels for various manual tasks. Included are, among others, \u003cstrong\u003emasonry trowels, Berner plastering trowels, pointing trowels, brick trowels, and jointing trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e. The equipment is complemented by a wooden float and a tiling sponge from Ardex.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for landscaping work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor direct work in the garden, the scope of delivery also includes \u003cstrong\u003eplanting trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e. The equipment is supplemented by various hand tools, making the tool box also suitable for general work in landscaping.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eScrewdriving and assembly tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor minor assembly and repair tasks, a \u003cstrong\u003eFatMax flat-head screwdriver\u003c\/strong\u003e, a Phillips screwdriver, and various wrenches are available. The set includes an adjustable wrench and combination wrenches in sizes 10 and 13.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIncluded tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eVersion \/ Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eClub hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 1000 g, handle length 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePoint chisel, Muller Carbone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eØ 16 mm, length 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFlat chisel, Muller Carbone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eØ 16 mm, length 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWater brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBristle length 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAsphalt spirit level A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's and fitter's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, width 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eUnion scrubbing brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSafety goggles incl. case\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eNippers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMasonry trowel, square, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBerner plastering trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePointing trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlumb bob\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight 400 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eChalk line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 20 m, Ø 1.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMarking string, nylon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 100 m, Ø 2.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteel frame tape measure, Grip Frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 30 m, tape width 13 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eStone setting chisel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e40 × 18 mm, length 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTar scraper (paint scraper)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade width 50 mm, thickness 1.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil, Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 sections, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFloat, pointed, wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e280 × 150 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMarking chalk (forestry chalk), red\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eChalk holder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFor chalk Ø 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eEar muffs, Arton\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCertified according to EN 352-1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBrick trowel, round, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eRubber mallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead 140 × 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eJointing trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade width 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eShaping hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 600 g, handle length 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil, Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 600 g, handle length 35 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiling sponge extra quality Ardex\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eKnee pads, plastic, box shape\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAdjustable wrench\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10\" \/ 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFlat-head screwdriver, FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 4, blade width 6.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePhillips screwdriver, FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePH2, blade length 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlanting trowels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 80 mm, width 80 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCombination wrench, Maxi Drive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 10, length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCombination wrench, Maxi Drive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 13, length 170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eName\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteinemann Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e650 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e420 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e24 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTool equipment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eExtensive tool set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor landscaping, construction site, and trade\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool box is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003elandscapers, garden designers, and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e who need a versatile tool set for various tasks. Through the combination of landscaping tools, masonry tools, measuring tools, and general hand tools, the set is highly versatile.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensive tool equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e for landscaping and trade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlanting trowels for garden work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eClub hammers, hammers, and chisels for striking work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMultiple masonry and plastering trowels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpirit level and mason's and fitter's square\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eVarious measuring and marking tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eScrewdrivers and wrenches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSafety goggles, ear protection, and knee pads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Landscaper's Tool Box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is particularly suitable for landscapers, garden designers, and tradespeople for various tasks in landscaping and on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included in the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box contains, among other things, hammers, club hammers, chisels, masonry and plastering trowels, planting trowels, measuring and marking tools, screwdrivers, wrenches, as well as protective and work accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Landscaper's Tool Box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a size of 650 × 330 mm and is 420 mm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the Landscaper's Tool Box is 24 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre planting trowels included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The delivery includes planting trowels with a size and width of 80 mm each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a spirit level included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool set includes an Asphalt A5 spirit level with a length of 600 mm and a profile of 50 × 21 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre measuring and marking tools included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Included are, among others, a 30 m steel frame tape measure, a 2 m folding rule, chalk line, marking string, plumb bob, marking chalk, and a chalk holder.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs protective equipment included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scope of delivery includes safety goggles including a case, ear muffs according to EN 352-1, and plastic knee pads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre wrenches included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes an adjustable wrench as well as combination wrenches in sizes 10 and 13.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box also suitable for general construction work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Besides tools for landscaping, the set contains numerous general trade and masonry tools and is therefore also suitable for various tasks on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Gartenbauer Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Gartenbauer, Landschaftsgärtner und Handwerker für verschiedene Arbeiten im Gartenbau und auf Baustellen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind in der Werkzeugkiste enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste enthält unter anderem Hämmer, Fäustel, Meissel, Maurer- und Putzkellen, Pflanzkellen, Mess- und Markierwerkzeuge, Schraubenzieher, Schraubenschlüssel sowie Schutz- und Arbeitszubehör.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Gartenbauer Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 650 × 330 mm und ist 420 mm hoch.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Gartenbauer Werkzeugkiste beträgt 24 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Pflanzkellen enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Im Lieferumfang sind Pflanzkellen mit einer Grösse und Breite von jeweils 80 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Wasserwaage enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Werkzeugset gehört eine Wasserwaage Asphalt A5 mit einer Länge von 600 mm und einem Profil von 50 × 21 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Mess- und Markierwerkzeuge enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Enthalten sind unter anderem ein 30 m Stahl-Rahmenbandmass, ein 2 m Gliedermeter, Senkelschnur, Trassierschnur, Senklot, Signierkreide und ein Kreidenhalter.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist Schutzausrüstung enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehören eine Schutzbrille inklusive Etui, ein Kapselgehörschutz nach EN 352-1 und Kunststoff-Knieschoner.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Schraubenschlüssel enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Set enthält einen Rollgabelschlüssel sowie Ringgabelschlüssel in den Grössen 10 und 13.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste auch für allgemeine Bauarbeiten geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Neben Werkzeugen für den Gartenbau enthält das Set zahlreiche allgemeine Handwerks- und Maurerwerkzeuge und eignet sich daher auch für verschiedene Arbeiten auf Baustellen.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Steinemann Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Landscaper's Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers an extensive collection of tools for landscaping, garden construction, and general trade tasks. With \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 330 mm size, 420 mm height, and 24 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is designed as a comprehensive tool kit for practical use.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e The combination of landscaping tools and classic trade tools is particularly practical. This allows the tool box to cover numerous typical work steps without having to assemble the most important tools individually.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155310989659,"sku":"9.264","price":639.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gartenbauer-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann.jpg?v=1790087732"},{"product_id":"polier-werkzeugkiste","title":"Foreman's tool chest | 1160 × 630 × 550 mm, 38.7 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eForeman's Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpacious tool box for foreman tasks, construction sites, and trade work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eForeman's Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers plenty of space for storing and transporting tools and accessories. With dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e1160 × 630 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a weight of 38.7 kg, it is suitable for use in foreman tasks, on construction sites, and in the workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlenty of space for tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a footprint of 1160 × 630 mm and a height of 550 mm, the Foreman's Tool Box offers generous dimensions for the organized storage of tools and work materials.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for foremen and tradespeople\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nDepending on the area of application, various tools and aids are required for foreman tasks. The \u003cstrong\u003eForeman's Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e makes it possible to keep the necessary equipment collected and ready for work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe generous dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e1160 × 630 × 550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e make this tool box particularly interesting for users who need more storage space than a smaller tool box can provide.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor construction sites and workshops\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Foreman's Tool Box is suitable for storing tools and accessories for \u003cstrong\u003eforeman tasks, finishing work, and general trade activities\u003c\/strong\u003e. It can be used both on the construction site and in the workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor \u003cstrong\u003eforemen and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for foreman and finishing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eGenerous footprint of 1160 × 630 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e550 mm height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e38.7 kg weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical for storing tools and accessories\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for construction sites and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDescription\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eForeman's Tool Box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1160 × 630 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e38.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Foreman's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGenerous dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e for tools and work materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1160 × 630 mm footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e550 mm height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e38.7 kg net weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for foreman tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical for construction sites and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eClear storage of tools and accessories\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Foreman's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Foreman's Tool Box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is particularly suitable for foremen and tradespeople for storing tools and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Foreman's Tool Box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a footprint of 1160 × 630 mm and a height of 550 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the Foreman's Tool Box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the tool box is 38.7 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space does the tool box offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a 1160 × 630 mm footprint and a height of 550 mm, the tool box offers generous dimensions for storing tools and accessories. An exact internal volume has not been specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box suitable for foreman tools?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is suitable for storing tools and accessories for foreman work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used on the construction site?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is suitable for use during trade work on construction sites and in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the box also suitable for other tradespeople?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In principle, the tool box can also be used to store other trade tools and work materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included in the delivery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific tool equipment was specified for this version. The product information refers to the tool box itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a height of 550 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the overall dimensions of the Foreman's Tool Box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified dimensions are 1160 × 630 mm with a height of 550 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Polier Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Polierer und Handwerker zur Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Zubehör.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Polier Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grundfläche von 1160 × 630 mm und eine Höhe von 550 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Polier Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Werkzeugkiste beträgt 38,7 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Platz bietet die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mit 1160 × 630 mm Grundfläche und 550 mm Höhe bietet die Werkzeugkiste grosszügige Abmessungen für die Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Zubehör. Ein genaues Innenvolumen wurde nicht angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste für Polierwerkzeug geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste ist für die Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Zubehör für Polierarbeiten geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste auf der Baustelle eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich für den Einsatz bei handwerklichen Arbeiten auf Baustellen und in der Werkstatt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich die Kiste auch für andere Handwerker?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste kann grundsätzlich auch zur Aufbewahrung anderer Handwerkswerkzeuge und Arbeitsmaterialien verwendet werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind im Lieferumfang enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Für diese Variante wurde keine konkrete Werkzeugausstattung angegeben. Die Produktangaben beziehen sich auf die Werkzeugkiste selbst.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Höhe von 550 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Polier Werkzeugkiste insgesamt?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebenen Abmessungen betragen 1160 × 630 mm bei einer Höhe von 550 mm.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Foreman's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eForeman's Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers generous dimensions for the storage of tools and accessories. With a \u003cstrong\u003e1160 × 630 mm footprint, 550 mm height, and 38.7 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is suitable for foreman tasks, construction sites, and workshops.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e If you have an extensive tool collection, it is worth keeping the required tools collected in a sufficiently large tool box. The generous dimensions of this version offer plenty of space for this.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155321442651,"sku":"9.265","price":879.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Polier-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087737"},{"product_id":"gipser-werkzeugkiste","title":"Plasterer's tool box | 700 × 400 × 350 mm, 11 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical tool box for plasterers, plastering work, and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a practical solution for storing and transporting tools for \u003cstrong\u003eplastering and finishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e. With dimensions of 700 × 400 mm, a height of 350 mm, and a weight of 11 kg, it is suitable for use on construction sites and in trade professions.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact tool box for plasterers:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a footprint of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 350 mm, the box is a practical size for storing plastering tools and other trade accessories.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for plasterers and tradespeople\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nClearly organized tool storage makes daily work on the construction site easier. The \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for plasterers, tradespeople, and other users who wish to keep their tools collected in one place.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e provide a practical combination of surface area and height. With a weight of 11 kg, the tool box can also be handled according to its size.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable for various tasks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool box can be used for storing tools needed for \u003cstrong\u003eplastering work, finishing tasks, and general construction projects\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is also suitable as a tool container for the construction site or workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor \u003cstrong\u003eplastering tools\u003c\/strong\u003e and trade tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for plastering and finishing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical for use on construction sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e700 × 400 mm footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e350 mm height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e11 kg weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDescription\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e11 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Plasterer's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical size\u003c\/strong\u003e for tools and trade accessories\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e700 × 400 mm footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e350 mm height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e11 kg dead weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for plasterers and tradespeople\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor construction sites, trades, and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical storage of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Plasterer's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the plasterer's tool box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is particularly suitable for plasterers and tradespeople for storing tools and accessories for various tasks on the construction site or in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the plasterer's tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a footprint of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the plasterer's tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the tool box is 11 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space does the tool box provide?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a footprint of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 350 mm. A precise internal volume has not been specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box suitable for plastering tools?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is suitable for storing tools for plastering work and other manual activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used on the construction site?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Due to its size, the tool box is suitable for use during manual work on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the box also suitable for other tradespeople?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box can generally also be used to store other trade tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included in the scope of delivery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific tool set is included for this version. The product details refer to the tool box itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a height of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the overall dimensions of the plasterer's tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified dimensions are 700 × 400 mm with a height of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Gipser und Handwerker zur Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Zubehör für verschiedene Arbeiten auf der Baustelle oder in der Werkstatt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grundfläche von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Werkzeugkiste beträgt 11 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Platz bietet die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grundfläche von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 350 mm. Ein genaues Innenvolumen wurde nicht angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste für Gipserwerkzeug geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste ist für die Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen für Gipserarbeiten und andere handwerkliche Tätigkeiten geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste auf der Baustelle eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Aufgrund ihrer Grösse eignet sich die Werkzeugkiste für den Einsatz bei handwerklichen Arbeiten auf Baustellen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich die Kiste auch für andere Handwerker?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste kann grundsätzlich auch zur Aufbewahrung anderer Handwerkswerkzeuge verwendet werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind im Lieferumfang enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Für diese Variante wurde keine konkrete Werkzeugausstattung angegeben. Die Produktangaben beziehen sich auf die Werkzeugkiste selbst.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Höhe von 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Gipser Werkzeugkiste insgesamt?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebenen Abmessungen betragen 700 × 400 mm bei einer Höhe von 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder a Plasterer's Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical solution for storing tools for plasterers, tradespeople, and finishing projects. With a \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm footprint, 350 mm height, and 11 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers a compact size for daily use.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e If you already have your own plastering tools, this tool box is an interesting solution for keeping the required equipment gathered and ready for use.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155329438043,"sku":"9.266","price":269.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gipser-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087743"},{"product_id":"gipser-werkzeugkiste-easy","title":"Plasterer's Toolbox Easy | Extensive Plasterer's Tool Set","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact and extensive tool set for plastering and rendering work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/strong\u003e contains a versatile selection of tools for \u003cstrong\u003eplastering, rendering, and interior finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e. The set includes, among other things, trowels, spatulas, smoothing tools, planes, saws, cutting tools, as well as measuring and alignment tools. With a size of \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of 310 mm, and a weight of 17.2 kg, the tool box offers practical basic equipment for everyday work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical basic plastering equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Easy tool box contains essential tools for various work steps – from trowels and spatulas to finishing trowels and planes, to a spirit level, square, and sponges.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlasterer's tool box for rendering and interior finishing work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/strong\u003e has been compiled for typical tasks in the plastering trade. It combines classic plastering tools with tools for smoothing, processing, cutting, and alignment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis makes the \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e suitable for tradespeople who need a practical selection of important tools for rendering and interior finishing and want to store them all together.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlastering trowels and spatulas\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nAn essential part of the equipment is a variety of trowels and spatulas for plastering and rendering work. In addition to a stainless steel brick trowel and a classic plastering trowel, several \u003cstrong\u003ecranked stainless steel plastering spatulas\u003c\/strong\u003e with different blade widths are included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eBrick trowel, square, stainless steel, 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlastering trowel Classic, 180 mm, widths 115 \/ 120 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCat's tongue, stainless steel, 140 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlastering spatula, stainless steel, with 40, 60, 80 and 100 mm blade width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStucco iron \/ plastering iron with 20 mm blade width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFinishing trowels and plastering trowels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nVarious finishing trowels and a large plastering trowel (Traufel) are available for \u003cstrong\u003esmoothing and processing plaster surfaces\u003c\/strong\u003e. The tool box contains both a stainless steel finishing trowel and a plastic finishing trowel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmoothing tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e The equipment includes a stainless steel finishing trowel measuring 280 × 140 mm, a plastic finishing trowel of the same size, as well as a stainless steel plastering trowel measuring 500 × 130 mm.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanes for plastering and white plastering work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nSeveral planes are included for working on plaster and surfaces. These include an \u003cstrong\u003ealuminium plasterer's plane\u003c\/strong\u003e and a wooden white plastering plane.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlasterer's plane, aluminium, 500 × 85 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWhite plastering plane, wood, 650 × 250 mm, 12 mm thick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSmoothing float, square, wood, 280 × 150 mm, 12 mm thick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSaws, knives, and cutting tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ePlasterer's Tool Set Easy\u003c\/strong\u003e contains several practical tools for various cutting and adjustment tasks. These include a plasterer's keyhole saw, a utility knife with a blade locking wheel, and straight tin snips.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlasterer's keyhole saw with 150 mm blade length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTin snips, right-cutting, 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUtility knife, 18 mm, with blade locking wheel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for alignment and measurement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nA \u003cstrong\u003e600 mm long Alpha aluminium spirit level\u003c\/strong\u003e is included for alignment and marking during plastering work. The equipment is complemented by a mason's and locksmith's square with a length of 600 mm and a width of 280 mm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis provides essential aids for checking dimensions and precise alignment during various tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSponges and floating tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool box contains various sponges and floating tools for the processing and finishing of surfaces. These include a universal sponge, an \u003cstrong\u003eextra-quality Ardex sponge for tilers\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a tile grouting float with soft foam rubber.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOther practical tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe equipment is rounded off by a plasterer's hatchet, pincers (Rabitz pliers), a plasterer's crusher, and a plastering pan. A \u003cstrong\u003e40 mm cylinder padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e is also included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications of the tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDesignation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e17.2 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDesign \/ Dimension\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTin snips, right-cutting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePincers (Rabitz pliers)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm, version Basic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's keyhole saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's crusher\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 130 mm, height 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering pan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 150 mm, height 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAlu-spirit level Alpha\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm, profile 48 × 22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e18 mm, with blade locking wheel, box of 12 knives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBrick trowel, square, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering trowel Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 180 mm, widths 115 \/ 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCat's tongue, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula, cranked, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula, cranked, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula, cranked, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula, cranked, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing trowel, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 140 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing trowel, plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 140 mm, blade thickness 3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering trowel (Traufel), stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 130 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSmoothing float, square, wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 150 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's plane, aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco iron \/ plastering iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUniversal sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e165 × 110 × 65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite plastering plane, wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e650 × 250 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTile grouting float with foam rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTiler's sponge, Ardex extra-quality\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's and locksmith's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 × 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat tasks is the plasterer's tool set suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlastering\u003c\/strong\u003e and rendering work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWhite plastering work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSmoothing and processing plaster surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorking with trowels and spatulas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eProcessing surfaces with planes and floats\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCutting and sawing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMeasuring and alignment work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eGeneral interior finishing and construction site tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Plasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensive basic equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e for plastering work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMultiple plastering spatulas with different blade widths\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlastering trowel, brick trowel, and cat's tongue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFinishing trowels and stainless steel plastering trowel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlasterer's and white plastering planes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTools for cutting and sawing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e600 mm long aluminium spirit level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMason's and locksmith's square for alignment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eVarious sponges and floating tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e tool box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e17.2 kg total weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Plasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Plasterer's Tool Box Easy suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is particularly suitable for plasterers and tradespeople who need versatile basic equipment for rendering, white plastering, and interior finishing work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included in the Plasterer's Tool Box Easy?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes, among other items, plastering trowels, a brick trowel, plastering spatulas, finishing trowels, a plastering trowel (Traufel), planes, saws, knives, a spirit level, a square, sponges, and other tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich plastering spatulas are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are cranked stainless steel plastering spatulas with 40, 60, 80, and 100 mm blade widths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes a square stainless steel brick trowel with a 200 mm blade length, a Classic plastering trowel with a 180 mm blade length, and a stainless steel cat's tongue with a 140 mm blade length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich planes are included in the tool set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are an aluminium plasterer's plane measuring 500 × 85 mm and a wooden white plastering plane measuring 650 × 250 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a spirit level included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes a yellow Alpha aluminium spirit level with a length of 600 mm and a profile of 48 × 22 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich smoothing tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are a stainless steel finishing trowel, a plastic finishing trowel, and a stainless steel plastering trowel (Traufel).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Plasterer's Tool Box Easy?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box measures 700 × 400 mm and has a height of 310 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the Plasterer's Tool Box Easy?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the tool box is 17.2 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a lock included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scope of delivery includes a 40 mm cylinder padlock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste Easy geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Gipser und Handwerker, die eine vielseitige Grundausstattung für Verputz-, Weissputz- und Ausbauarbeiten benötigen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind in der Gipser Werkzeugkiste Easy enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält unter anderem Gipserkellen, Maurerkelle, Gipserspachtel, Glättekellen, Traufel, Hobel, Sägen, Messer, Wasserwaage, Winkel, Schwämme und weitere Werkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Gipserspachtel sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind gekröpfte Inox-Gipserspachtel mit 40, 60, 80 und 100 mm Blattbreite.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Kellen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Zur Ausstattung gehören eine kantige Inox-Maurerkelle mit 200 mm Blattlänge, eine Gipserkelle Classic mit 180 mm Blattlänge und eine Inox-Katzenzunge mit 140 mm Blattlänge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Hobel sind im Werkzeugset enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind ein Gipserhobel aus Aluminium mit 500 × 85 mm und ein Weissputzhobel aus Holz mit 650 × 250 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Wasserwaage enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Set enthält eine gelbe Alu-Wasserwaage Alpha mit einer Länge von 600 mm und einem Profil von 48 × 22 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge zum Glätten sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind eine Glättekelle aus rostfreiem Stahl, eine Kunststoff-Glättekelle und eine rostfreie Stahl-Traufel.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste Easy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 310 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste Easy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Werkzeugkiste beträgt 17,2 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Schloss im Lieferumfang enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Im Lieferumfang ist ein Zylinderhangschloss mit einer Grösse von 40 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder Plasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003ePlasterer's Tool Box Easy\u003c\/strong\u003e offers versatile basic equipment for plastering and rendering work. With trowels, spatulas, finishing trowels, a plastering trowel, planes, cutting tools, a spirit level, and other practical tools, it is suitable for numerous work steps on the construction site.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Easy version is particularly interesting if you are looking for versatile basic plastering equipment. The combination of classic trowels and spatulas as well as planes, cutting, and measuring tools covers many typical tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155339202907,"sku":"9.267","price":459.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gipser-Werkzeugkiste-Easy.jpg?v=1790087748"},{"product_id":"werkzeugwagen-177-teilig-bueezer","title":"Büezer tool trolley 177-piece | Workshop trolley with 6 drawers","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBüezer Tool Trolley, 177-piece\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive tool trolley with 177 pieces and 6 drawers\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eBüezer 177-piece tool trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e offers an extensive range of tools for workshops, trades, and professional work areas. With \u003cstrong\u003e177 pieces\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e6 drawers\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a sheet steel construction, the tool trolley provides a practical combination of tool storage and comprehensive basic equipment. The trolley measures \u003cstrong\u003e90.1 × 77 × 45.8 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and weighs 78 kg.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e177-piece equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Büezer tool trolley combines a sturdy \u003cstrong\u003esheet steel\u003c\/strong\u003e tool trolley with 177 pieces and 6 drawers. This provides a comprehensive set of tools for various tasks in the workshop and trade.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool trolley for workshops and trade\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nA well-organized workspace makes it easier to access frequently used tools. The \u003cstrong\u003eBüezer tool trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e combines tool storage with an extensive set of 177 pieces.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe six drawers allow for structured tool storage. This way, various tools can be kept clearly arranged in the tool trolley and ready to hand at the workstation.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e177-piece tool set\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a total of \u003cstrong\u003e177 pieces\u003c\/strong\u003e, the tool trolley offers a comprehensive basic set for various manual and technical tasks. The combination of tool trolley and tool set is particularly suitable for users who want to store many tools centrally in one place.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOne trolley – 177 pieces:\u003c\/strong\u003e Thanks to its extensive equipment, the Büezer tool trolley is suitable as a central tool solution for workshops and trades.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e6 drawers for clear tool storage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool trolley features \u003cstrong\u003e6 drawers\u003c\/strong\u003e. These offer the possibility to clearly organize the 177-piece tool set and store different tools separately from each other.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e6 drawers\u003c\/strong\u003e for structured tool storage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e177-piece tool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for organizing various tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eKeep tools centrally at the workplace\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSturdy sheet steel design\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool trolley is made of \u003cstrong\u003esheet steel\u003c\/strong\u003e. With a total weight of 78 kg, the trolley features a solid design and is intended for use as a stationary or mobile tool solution in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpace-saving organization at the workplace\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e90.1 × 77 × 45.8 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the tool trolley offers a compact footprint relative to its extensive equipment. The six drawers provide a structured storage option for the 177 tools included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDescription\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBüezer Tool Trolley, 177-piece\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e90.1 × 77 × 45.8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e78 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSheet steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eNumber of pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e177\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eNumber of drawers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat tasks is the tool trolley suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshop tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e and manual activities\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eGeneral assembly and repair work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTool storage in manual trades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOrganization of a central workstation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStorage and organization of 177 tool parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eProfessional workshop and work areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Büezer 177-piece tool trolley\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e177-piece tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e6 drawers\u003c\/strong\u003e for structured storage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eRobust design made of \u003cstrong\u003esheet steel\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eComprehensive tool equipment for workshops and trades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTools can be organized centrally and clearly\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e90.1 × 77 × 45.8 cm size\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e78 kg total weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical combination of tool trolley and tool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Büezer 177-piece tool trolley\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many pieces does the Büezer tool trolley contain?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Büezer tool trolley is equipped with a total of \u003cstrong\u003e177 pieces\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many drawers does the tool trolley have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool trolley has \u003cstrong\u003e6 drawers\u003c\/strong\u003e for structured tool storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the tool trolley made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool trolley is made of \u003cstrong\u003esheet steel\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Büezer tool trolley?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool trolley measures 90.1 × 77 × 45.8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool trolley?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool trolley has a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e78 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Büezer tool trolley suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool trolley is suitable for tradespeople, workshops, and users who want to store an extensive range of tools centrally and clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool trolley suitable for a workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With 177 pieces and 6 drawers, the tool trolley is suitable for organizing tools in workshops and trades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan tools be stored in an organized manner?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The six drawers allow for structured storage and organization of the included tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool trolley also suitable for tradespeople?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The combination of a 177-piece tool set and tool trolley is suitable for various manual and technical tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is special about the Büezer tool trolley?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool trolley combines a sheet steel design with 6 drawers and an extensive set of 177 tool pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Teile enthält der Werkzeugwagen Büezer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen Büezer ist mit insgesamt 177 Teilen ausgestattet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Schubladen hat der Werkzeugwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen verfügt über 6 Schubladen zur strukturierten Aufbewahrung der Werkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht der Werkzeugwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen besteht aus Stahlblech.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Werkzeugwagen Büezer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen misst 90,1 × 77 × 45,8 cm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist der Werkzeugwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen hat ein Gewicht von 78 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen eignet sich der Werkzeugwagen Büezer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen eignet sich für Handwerker, Werkstätten und Anwender, die eine umfangreiche Werkzeugausstattung zentral und übersichtlich aufbewahren möchten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Werkzeugwagen für eine Werkstatt geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Werkzeugwagen ist mit 177 Teilen und 6 Schubladen für die Werkzeugorganisation in Werkstatt und Handwerk geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann das Werkzeug übersichtlich aufbewahrt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die sechs Schubladen ermöglichen eine strukturierte Aufbewahrung und Organisation der enthaltenen Werkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Werkzeugwagen auch für Handwerker geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Kombination aus 177-teiligem Werkzeugset und Werkzeugwagen eignet sich für unterschiedliche handwerkliche und technische Arbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist das Besondere am Büezer Werkzeugwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Werkzeugwagen kombiniert eine Ausführung aus Stahlblech mit 6 Schubladen und einer umfangreichen Ausstattung von 177 Werkzeugteilen.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Büezer 177-piece tool trolley\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eBüezer 177-piece tool trolley\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive tool solution for workshops and trades. With \u003cstrong\u003e177 pieces, 6 drawers, and a sheet steel design\u003c\/strong\u003e, it combines structured tool storage with extensive basic equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Arrange the tools in the six drawers according to their area of application or frequency of use. This keeps frequently needed tools quickly accessible and the workplace clearly organized.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155348050267,"sku":"9.281","price":499.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Werkzeugwagen-177-teilig-B_C3_BCezer.jpg?v=1790087753"},{"product_id":"gipser-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Steinemann Plasterer's Tool Box | Extensive Tool Set","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensive tool set for plastering, rendering, and interior finishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e offers an extensive collection of tools for \u003cstrong\u003eplasterers, rendering work, and interior finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e. With numerous trowels, spatulas, smoothing tools, planes, saws, and measuring instruments, the set covers many typical tasks in the plastering trade. The toolbox measures \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, is 310 mm high, and weighs 20.4 kg.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensively equipped:\u003c\/strong\u003e The plasterer's tool set includes, among other things, plastering trowels, stainless steel plastering spatulas, stucco irons, smoothing trowels, finishing trowels, white plaster planes, plastering planes, facade planes, saws, pincers, as well as a spirit level and chalk line reel.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlasterer's toolbox for the professional workday\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn the plastering trade, different tools are used depending on the work step. The \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a large selection of essential tools in a single kit, making it suitable for numerous tasks involving plaster, gypsum, and surfaces.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFrom preparation and processing to application and spreading, all the way to \u003cstrong\u003esmoothing and finishing surfaces\u003c\/strong\u003e, the appropriate tools are available. The set also includes suitable tools for measuring, marking, and small assembly tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlastering trowels and spatulas\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nA focus of the toolbox is on classic tools for plastering work. It includes plastering trowels, several cranked stainless steel plastering spatulas, and a heart-shaped spatula.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eClassic plastering trowels with 180 mm blade length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel plastering spatulas with 60, 80, and 100 mm blade width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel heart-shaped spatula with 100 mm blade width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel \"cat's tongue\" spatula with 140 mm blade length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel Berner plastering trowel with 140 mm blade length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStucco irons with 10 and 20 mm blade width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSmoothing and finishing trowels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor smoothing and working with plaster and surface materials, the \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e contains several smoothing and finishing trowels in various designs.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to steel and stainless steel smoothing trowels, a plastic smoothing trowel is included. For the finishing trowels, both steel and stainless steel versions are available.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVarious smoothing tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e The equipment includes smoothing trowels with 280 × 130 and 280 × 140 mm blade sizes, as well as finishing trowels with 500 × 130 and 500 × 140 mm. This provides different tools for various work steps.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanes for plaster and surfaces\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor processing and finishing surfaces, the toolbox contains several planes. These include a \u003cstrong\u003ewooden white plaster plane measuring 650 × 250 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 500 mm long aluminum plastering plane, and a facade plane with sandpaper.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWooden white plaster plane, 650 × 250 mm, 12 mm thick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAluminum plastering plane, 500 × 85 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFacade plane with sandpaper, aluminum, 280 × 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSurform standard metal plane, 315 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSaws and cutting tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor cutting, sawing, and adjustment work, the \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e contains various tools. These include a hand saw or backsaw, a plasterer's saw, and a \"Stichling\" keyhole saw.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe equipment is rounded off by straight tin snips and a utility knife with a blade locking wheel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHammers, pliers, and other hand tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor general manual work, tools such as a \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's hatchet with a 600 g head weight\u003c\/strong\u003e and \"Top Extra\" style pincers are available. Additionally, screwdrivers for minor assembly work are included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlasterer's hatchet, 600 g, 320 mm length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePincers, 220 mm, Top Extra\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePhillips FatMax cross-head screwdriver, PH2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFlat-head screwdriver with parallel tip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCylinder padlock, 40 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMeasuring, marking, and alignment tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nPrecise alignment and clean marking are important for plastering and finishing work. Therefore, the tool set also includes various \u003cstrong\u003emeasuring and marking tools\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIncluded are a 600 mm Asphalt A5 spirit level, a mason's and locksmith's square measuring 600 × 330 mm, a 30 m chalk line reel, and a 2 m Stabila wooden folding rule.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSponge and brush for finishing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor cleaning and finishing work, an \u003cstrong\u003eextra-quality Ardex tile-layer's sponge\u003c\/strong\u003e, a ceiling brush, and a steel sponge are included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDescription\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e20.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIncluded tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eVersion \/ Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStabila wooden folding rule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections, 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil Import\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e24 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's and locksmith's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTin snips, straight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner filler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHand saw \/ Backsaw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaster cup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 130 mm, height 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaster pan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic plastering trowels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 180 mm, widths 115 \/ 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel cranked plastering spatula\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel cranked plastering spatula\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel cranked plastering spatula\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel heart-shaped spatula\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco iron \/ Plasterer's iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco iron \/ Plasterer's iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel cat's tongue spatula\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel Berner plastering trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eArdex tile-layer's sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExtra quality, 170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCeiling brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e150 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel smoothing trowel with wide bevel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 130 mm, blade 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel smoothing trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 130 mm, blade 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel finishing trowel with wide bevel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 140 mm, blade 0.70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel finishing trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 130 mm, blade 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic smoothing trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 140 mm, blade 3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWooden white plaster plane\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e650 × 250 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminum plastering plane\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAsphalt A5 spirit level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminum facade plane with sandpaper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility knife with blade locking wheel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePhillips FatMax cross-head screwdriver\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePH2, blade length 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat-head screwdriver, parallel tip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 2, blade width 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePincers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm, Top Extra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's saw \/ Ceiling saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eToothing 8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\"Stichling\" keyhole saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e360 mm, Ø 6.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSurform standard metal plane\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eChalk line reel with color powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m, line Ø 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich tasks is the plasterer's tool set suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlastering\u003c\/strong\u003e and rendering work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSmoothing and finishing of plaster surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWork with gypsum and plaster\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWhite plastering work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eProcessing and finishing of surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCutting and sawing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMeasuring, marking, and alignment work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eGeneral interior finishing and construction site work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Steinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensive tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e for plastering and rendering work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMultiple plastering trowels and spatulas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eVarious smoothing and finishing trowels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMultiple planes for plaster and surface work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTools for cutting and sawing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpirit level, square, and chalk line reel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel spatulas and smoothing tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eExtra-quality Ardex tile-layer's sponge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e toolbox\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e20.4 kg total weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Steinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is this plasterer's toolbox suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox was compiled for plastering and rendering work and is particularly suitable for plasterers and interior finishing tradespeople.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included in the plasterer's tool set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes, among others, plastering trowels, plastering spatulas, stucco irons, smoothing trowels, finishing trowels, planes, saws, pincers, and measuring\/alignment tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich plastering trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes Classic plastering trowels with a 180 mm blade length and widths of 115 and 120 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich plastering spatulas are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are cranked stainless steel plastering spatulas with 60, 80, and 100 mm blade width, as well as a stainless steel heart-shaped spatula with a 100 mm blade width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich smoothing and finishing trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes smoothing trowels made of steel, stainless steel, and plastic, as well as steel and stainless steel finishing trowels in various sizes and designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich planes are included in the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are a wooden white plaster plane, an aluminum plastering plane, a facade plane with sandpaper, and a metal Surform standard plane.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich measuring tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool set includes a 600 mm Asphalt A5 spirit level, a mason's and locksmith's square (600 × 330 mm), a 30 m chalk line reel, and a 2 m Stabila folding rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the plasterer's toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox measures 700 × 400 mm and has a height of 310 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the plasterer's toolbox is 20.4 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a lock included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool set includes a 40 mm cylinder padlock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste wurde für Gipser- und Verputzarbeiten zusammengestellt und eignet sich insbesondere für Gipser und Handwerker im Innenausbau.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind im Gipser Werkzeugset enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält unter anderem Gipserkellen, Gipserspachtel, Stukkatureisen, Glättekellen, Traufeln, Hobel, Sägen, eine Rabitzzange sowie Mess- und Ausrichtwerkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Gipserkellen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind Gipserkellen Classic mit 180 mm Blattlänge und Breiten von 115 beziehungsweise 120 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Gipserspachtel sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind gekröpfte Inox-Gipserspachtel mit 60, 80 und 100 mm Blattbreite sowie ein Inox-Herzspachtel mit 100 mm Blattbreite.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Glättekellen und Traufeln sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält Glättekellen aus Stahl, rostfreiem Stahl und Kunststoff sowie Stahl- und Inox-Traufeln in verschiedenen Grössen und Ausführungen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Hobel sind im Set enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind ein Weissputzhobel aus Holz, ein Gipserhobel aus Aluminium, ein Fassadenhobel mit Schleifpapier und ein Surform Standardhobel aus Metall.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Messwerkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Werkzeugset enthält eine 600 mm lange Wasserwaage Asphalt A5, einen Maurer- und Schlosserwinkel mit 600 × 330 mm, ein 30 m langes Schlagschnurgerät sowie einen 2 m langen Stabila Gliedermeter.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Gipser Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 310 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Gipser Werkzeugkiste beträgt 20,4 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Schloss im Lieferumfang enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Im Werkzeugset ist ein Zylinderhangschloss mit einer Grösse von 40 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Steinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Plasterer's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e offers an extensive collection of tools for plasterers, rendering work, and interior finishing. With various trowels, spatulas, smoothing tools, planes, saws, and measuring instruments, it is suitable for numerous typical tasks on the construction site.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e The toolbox covers many different work steps. The combination of classic plastering tools such as trowels and spatulas with planes, saws, and measuring tools is particularly practical, ensuring that the right tools are available for various tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155358601563,"sku":"9.268","price":629.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gipser-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann.jpg?v=1790087760"},{"product_id":"fassadenbauer-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Facade builder toolbox Steinemann | Tool set","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive tool set for facade construction, insulation, and plastering work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e is an extensively compiled tool set for work in \u003cstrong\u003efacade construction, with insulation boards, and for plastering tasks\u003c\/strong\u003e. The toolbox contains numerous trowels, spatulas, planers, knives, saws, cutting tools, and measuring tools. With dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of 350 mm, and a weight of 23.5 kg, it is designed for versatile use in facade construction.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFully equipped for facade construction:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Steinemann toolbox includes, among other things, insulation board knives, insulation knife holders, facade planers, smoothing trowels, notched trowels, notched floats, masonry trowels, plasterer's spatulas, corner spatulas, a spirit level, and a chalk line reel.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFacade builder tool box for professional work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nDifferent tools are required for facade work depending on the work step. From the processing and adjustment of \u003cstrong\u003einsulation boards\u003c\/strong\u003e to the application and smoothing of materials, up to alignment and measurement, this tool set offers an extensive basic set of equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e combines numerous tools for typical facade construction tasks in one shared toolbox. This allows the necessary tools to be kept clearly organized in one place.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for insulation boards and facade planers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nSeveral special tools are included for processing insulation boards. These include an \u003cstrong\u003einsulation knife with a 280 mm blade length\u003c\/strong\u003e and an insulation knife holder approximately 450 mm in length.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe equipment is supplemented by two \u003cstrong\u003ealuminum facade planers with sandpaper\u003c\/strong\u003e. The two versions have sizes of 280 × 150 mm and 420 × 200 mm. Additionally, a 315 mm long metal Surform standard planer is included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTrowels, spatulas, and smoothing tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor plastering and facade work, the toolbox contains an extensive selection of trowels and spatulas. These include an \u003cstrong\u003eInox masonry trowel with a 200 mm blade length\u003c\/strong\u003e, a Berner Classic plastering trowel with a 160 mm blade length, and several offset stainless steel plasterer's spatulas.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eInox plasterer's spatulas with 40, 60, 80, and 150 mm blade widths\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOuter corner spatula and inner corner spatula, each 80 × 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel smoothing trowel, 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlastic pointed smoothing trowel, 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlastic pointed rubbing disc, 160 × 90 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStainless steel float, 500 × 130 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStucco tools with 20 and 30 mm blade widths\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStabil-type caulking gun\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNotched trowels and notched floats\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nSeveral \u003cstrong\u003esteel notched trowels and notched floats\u003c\/strong\u003e are available for applying and distributing materials. The equipment includes various tooth patterns and blade sizes.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDifferent tooth patterns:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included are E18 and E22 notched trowels measuring 280 × 130 mm, as well as E18 and E22 notched floats measuring 500 × 130 mm. This provides different toothings for various applications.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnives, saws, and cutting tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe toolbox contains various cutting and sawing tools for working  with different materials. In addition to the \u003cstrong\u003einsulation knife for insulation boards\u003c\/strong\u003e, it includes, among other things, a utility knife, trapezoidal blade knife, tin snips, utility scissors, keyhole saw, and veneer saw.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUtility knife, 150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eInsulation knife with 280 mm blade length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eInsulation knife holder, approx. 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStraight tin snips, 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eKnife with retractable trapezoidal blade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUtility scissors, 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eKeyhole saw \/ hole saw with 300 mm blade length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eVeneer saw, 330 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHammers and pliers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor various manual tasks, a \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's hatchet with a 600 g head weight\u003c\/strong\u003e and a machinist's hammer with a 500 g head weight are included. A 250 mm long Top Extra nail nipper rounds out the equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMeasuring and alignment tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nImportant tools are also available for precise alignment and marking. The equipment includes an \u003cstrong\u003eAsphalt A5 spirit level with a length of 600 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a masonry and machinist's square with 600 mm length and 330 mm width, and a 30 m long chalk line reel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nA 2 m long \u003cstrong\u003eStabila wooden folding rule\u003c\/strong\u003e and a 240 mm long Lyra carpenter's pencil complete the measuring and marking equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDesignation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e23.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIncluded tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eVersion \/ Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInsulation knife \/ insulation board knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInsulation knife holder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength approx. 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTin snips, straight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKnife with retractable trapezoidal blade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDie-cast zinc\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSurform standard metal planer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility scissors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNail nipper (Rabitz pliers)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm, Top Extra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKeyhole saw \/ hole saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVeneer saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCeiling brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e150 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco tool \/ plasterer's iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco tool \/ plasterer's iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMasonry trowel, square, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula, offset, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula, offset, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula, offset, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula, heart-shaped, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e150 mm blade width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBerner Classic plastering trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinist's hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 g, handle length 32 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOuter corner spatula, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 × 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInner corner spatula, Inox\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 × 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSmoothing trowel, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 130 mm, blade 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSmoothing trowel, pointed, plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 130 mm, blade 3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRubbing disc, pointed, plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e160 × 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFacade planer with sandpaper, aluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFloat, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 130 mm, blade 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStabil-type caulking gun\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFacade planer with sandpaper, aluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e420 × 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched trowel, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E22, 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched trowel, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E18, 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched float, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E18, 500 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched float, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E22, 500 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat-head screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 2, blade width 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat-head screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 4, blade width 6.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpirit level Asphalt A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMasonry and machinist's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eChalk line reel \/ marking string\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m, string Ø 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLyra carpenter's pencil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStabila wooden folding rule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections, 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat work is this tool set suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFacade construction\u003c\/strong\u003e and facade renovation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eProcessing of insulation boards\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlastering and smoothing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eApplying and distributing materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eProcessing of facade surfaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCutting and adjustment work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMeasuring, marking, and alignment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eGeneral manual work on the construction site\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e specifically for facade work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTools for insulation boards and facade planers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMultiple trowels, spatulas, and smoothing tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eVarious notched trowels and notched floats\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTools for cutting, sawing, and processing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpirit level and masonry\/machinist's square for alignment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eChalk line reel and folding rule for measuring and marking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e sized toolbox\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e23.5 kg total weight\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical compilation for facade builders and plasterers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Steinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Facade Builder Tool Box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox was compiled for facade construction work and is particularly suitable for facade builders, plasterers, and craftsmen in the field of insulation and plastering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included in the Facade Builder Tool Box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox includes, among other items, insulation knives, facade planers, trowels, spatulas, notched trowels, notched floats, saws, scissors, hammers, pliers, as well as measuring and alignment tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs an insulation board knife included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. An insulation knife, or insulation board knife, with a blade length of 280 mm is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich facade planers are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTwo aluminum facade planers with sandpaper are included. One has a size of 280 × 150 mm, the other 420 × 200 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich notched trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are steel notched trowels with tooth patterns E18 and E22, each 280 × 130 mm in size. Additionally, E18 and E22 steel notched floats measuring 500 × 130 mm are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich trowels and spatulas are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment includes, among other things, an Inox masonry trowel, several offset plasterer's spatulas, heart-shaped spatulas, corner spatulas, smoothing trowels, a Berner plastering trowel, and a stainless steel float.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich measuring tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes a 600 mm long spirit level, a masonry and machinist's square with 600 × 330 mm, a 30 m long chalk line reel, a 2 m long Stabila folding rule, and a Lyra carpenter's pencil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox has dimensions of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the Facade Builder Tool Box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the completely assembled toolbox is 23.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a lock included in the delivery?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A 40 mm cylinder padlock is included in the tool set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Fassadenbauer Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste wurde für Arbeiten im Fassadenbau zusammengestellt und eignet sich insbesondere für Fassadenbauer, Gipser und Handwerker im Bereich Dämmung und Verputzarbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind in der Fassadenbauer Werkzeugkiste enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste enthält unter anderem Dämmstoffmesser, Fassadenhobel, Kellen, Spachtel, Zahnkellen, Zahntraufeln, Sägen, Scheren, Hämmer, Zangen sowie Mess- und Ausrichtwerkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Dämmstoffplattenmesser enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Enthalten ist ein Isolationsmesser beziehungsweise Dämmstoffplattenmesser mit einer Klingenlänge von 280 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Fassadenhobel sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind zwei Fassadenhobel mit Schleifpapier aus Aluminium. Einer hat eine Grösse von 280 × 150 mm, der andere 420 × 200 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Zahnkellen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind Stahl-Zahnkellen mit den Zahnbildern E18 und E22, jeweils 280 × 130 mm gross. Zusätzlich sind Stahl-Zahntraufeln E18 und E22 mit 500 × 130 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Kellen und Spachtel sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Zur Ausstattung gehören unter anderem eine Inox-Maurerkelle, mehrere gekröpfte Gipserspachtel, Herzspachtel, Eckenspachtel, Glättekellen, eine Berner Putzkelle und eine rostfreie Stahl-Traufel.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Messwerkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält eine 600 mm lange Wasserwaage, einen Maurer- und Schlosserwinkel mit 600 × 330 mm, ein 30 m langes Schlagschnurgerät, einen 2 m langen Stabila Gliedermeter und einen Lyra Zimmermanns-Bleistift.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Fassadenbauer Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der komplett zusammengestellten Werkzeugkiste beträgt 23,5 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Schloss im Lieferumfang enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Im Werkzeugset ist ein Zylinderhangschloss mit einer Grösse von 40 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Steinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith the \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Facade Builder Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e, facade builders receive a comprehensive compilation of essential tools for insulation, plastering, smoothing, facade processing, as well as measuring and alignment work. The combination of trowels, spatulas, facade planers, insulation knives, notched trowels, and measuring tools makes this toolbox a versatile set of equipment for facade construction.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e For facade work, different tools are often needed for several work steps. A prepared toolbox helps keep the most important tools stored together and ready for immediate use on the construction site.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155368366427,"sku":"9.269","price":719.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Fassadenbauer-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann.jpg?v=1790087766"},{"product_id":"plattenleger-werkzeugkiste","title":"Tiler's tool box | 600 × 350 × 300 mm, 9 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTiler's Toolbox\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical toolbox for slab layers, tilers, and craftsmen\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eTiler's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e, measuring \u003cstrong\u003e600 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e with a height of \u003cstrong\u003e300 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e9 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, offers a compact solution for storing and transporting tools. It is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003eslab layers, tilers, construction sites, and craft-related work\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact toolbox for tilers:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a footprint of 600 × 350 mm and a height of 300 mm, the toolbox offers a practical size for tool storage. The weight of \u003cstrong\u003e9 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e makes for a comparatively lightweight design.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eToolbox for slab layers and tilers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWell-organized tool storage is particularly practical on construction sites and for manual work. The \u003cstrong\u003eTiler's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e is geared towards use in the field of slab and tile work and offers space for the tools required for each task.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe box can be used for the \u003cstrong\u003eorganized storage of tiler's tools\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for use on the construction site as well as in the workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a size of \u003cstrong\u003e600 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of \u003cstrong\u003e300 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the toolbox has compact dimensions. This makes it easy to integrate into the organization of the workspace and provides a clear way to store tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions:\u003c\/strong\u003e 600 × 350 mm with a height of 300 mm. The compact size is suitable for the practical organization of tools for slab and tile work.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e9 kg weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eTiler's Toolbox weighs 9 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes it lighter than extensively equipped toolboxes and offers a good foundation for the individual assembly of the required tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor construction sites, workshops, and trade\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlab layers\u003c\/strong\u003e and tilers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eManual work on construction sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTool storage in the workshop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOrganization and storage of tiler's tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eIndividual assembly of required tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e600 × 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e9 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Tiler's Toolbox at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact size\u003c\/strong\u003e of 600 × 350 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eHeight of \u003cstrong\u003e300 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e9 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for tool storage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor \u003cstrong\u003eslab layers and tilers\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical for construction sites and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAllows for individual assembly of required tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the Tiler's Toolbox suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox is particularly suitable for slab layers and tilers, as well as craftsmen who want to store tools for slab and tile work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Tiler's Toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox has a size of 600 × 350 mm and a height of 300 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight of the Tiler's Toolbox is 9 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the toolbox suitable for slab layers?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The toolbox is suitable for the storage and organization of tools in the field of slab and tile laying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the toolbox be used on the construction site?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The toolbox is suitable for tool storage on construction sites as well as for manual work and use in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific included tools are listed for this version. The toolbox can be equipped with the required tools according to individual needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe base dimensions are 600 × 350 mm. The height is 300 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the toolbox also suitable for the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The box can be used for the organized storage of tools in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the toolbox heavy?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox weighs 9 kg. This makes it comparatively light for a toolbox of this size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the toolbox be individually configured?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Since no fixed set of tools is specified for this version, it can be individually equipped with the tools required for the respective slab and tile work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Plattenleger Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Plattenleger und Fliesenleger sowie für Handwerker, die Werkzeuge für Platten- und Fliesenarbeiten aufbewahren möchten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Plattenleger Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 600 × 350 mm und eine Höhe von 300 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Gewicht der Plattenleger Werkzeugkiste beträgt 9 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste für Plattenleger geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste ist für die Aufbewahrung und Organisation von Werkzeugen im Bereich Plattenlegen und Fliesenlegen geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste auf der Baustelle eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich für die Werkzeugaufbewahrung auf Baustellen sowie für handwerkliche Arbeiten und den Einsatz in der Werkstatt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Für diese Ausführung wurden keine konkreten enthaltenen Werkzeuge angegeben. Die Werkzeugkiste kann entsprechend dem individuellen Bedarf mit den benötigten Werkzeugen bestückt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Grundabmessungen betragen 600 × 350 mm. Die Höhe beträgt 300 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste auch für die Werkstatt geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Kiste kann zur geordneten Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen in der Werkstatt verwendet werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste schwer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste wiegt 9 kg. Damit ist sie für eine Werkzeugkiste dieser Grösse vergleichsweise leicht.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste individuell bestückt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Da für diese Ausführung kein fester Werkzeugumfang angegeben ist, kann sie individuell mit den für die jeweiligen Platten- und Fliesenarbeiten benötigten Werkzeugen bestückt werden.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eTiler's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact solution for the storage and organization of tools. With a size of \u003cstrong\u003e600 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of 300 mm, and a weight of 9 kg, it is suitable for slab layers, tilers, construction sites, and workshops.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Organize the toolbox with the tools you regularly need for your specific slab and tile work. This keeps essential tools clearly organized and within reach at the workspace.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155379802459,"sku":"9.270","price":279.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Plattenleger-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087772"},{"product_id":"plattenleger-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Tiler's tool box Steinemann | 600 × 350 x 300 mm, 16.6 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive tool set for slab layers and tilers\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e is an extensively equipped tool set for professional work involving slabs, tiles, and construction sites. With dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e600 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of \u003cstrong\u003e300 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e16.6 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the toolbox contains numerous tools for tilers, including \u003cstrong\u003eE4, E6, and E8 notched trowels, slab and glass cutters, rubber mallets, cutting and breaking pliers, nippers, tiler's hammers, and tiler's chisels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComplete tiler's tool set:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Steinemann toolbox combines a comprehensive selection of tools for \u003cstrong\u003elaying, processing, and aligning slabs and tiles\u003c\/strong\u003e. Included are, among other things, three notched trowels, a slab and glass cutter, various tiler's hammers, pliers, chisels, a spirit level, a mason's square, and other construction site tools.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTiler's toolbox with extensive equipment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e has been designed for work requiring versatile tooling. The extensive contents cover numerous typical tasks involved in \u003cstrong\u003eslab and tile laying\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool set includes, among other items, \u003cstrong\u003enotched trowels with E4, E6, and E8 tooth patterns\u003c\/strong\u003e, a tiler's trowel, a slab and glass cutter, tiler's cutting and breaking pliers, and tiler's nippers. The equipment is supplemented by various hammers, chisels, measuring and alignment tools, as well as cleaning and finishing tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eE4, E6, and E8 notched trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSilberschnitt slab and glass cutter\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTiler's cutting and breaking pliers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTiler's nippers (parrot-beak pliers)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTiler's rubber mallet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFlat and pointed tiler's hammers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePointed and flat tiler's chisels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eArdex tiler's sponge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpirit level, mason's square, and plumb bob\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eClub hammer, pointed chisel, and cold chisel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE4, E6, and E8 notched trowels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor various adhesive and laying tasks, the toolbox contains three \u003cstrong\u003esteel notched trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003eE4, E6, and E8 tooth patterns\u003c\/strong\u003e. All three notched trowels have a blade size of \u003cstrong\u003e280 × 130 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree tooth patterns:\u003c\/strong\u003e With E4, E6, and E8, various notched trowels are available to meet different requirements when applying laying materials.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSlab cutter and tiler's pliers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor processing slabs and tiles, the set contains a \u003cstrong\u003eSilberschnitt slab and glass cutter\u003c\/strong\u003e with a length of 135 mm. Additionally, 210 mm \u003cstrong\u003etiler's cutting and breaking pliers\u003c\/strong\u003e and 200 mm \u003cstrong\u003etiler's nippers (parrot-beak pliers)\u003c\/strong\u003e are included.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool set thus covers various work steps in the processing of slabs and tiles.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHammers and chisels for tilers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tiler's toolbox contains several suitable tools for processing tasks. These include a \u003cstrong\u003etiler's rubber mallet\u003c\/strong\u003e, a flat and a pointed tiler's hammer, as well as a pointed and a flat tiler's chisel.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tiler's rubber mallet is size 2 with a head size of \u003cstrong\u003e110 × 60 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both tiler's hammers have a head weight of \u003cstrong\u003e75 g\u003c\/strong\u003e each.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMeasuring and alignment tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe set also includes several tools for measuring and alignment tasks. These include an \u003cstrong\u003eAsphalt A5 spirit level\u003c\/strong\u003e with a length of 400 mm, a \u003cstrong\u003emason's and engineer's square\u003c\/strong\u003e with a length of 500 mm and a width of 280 mm, and a \u003cstrong\u003e300 g plumb bob\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe equipment is rounded off by a 2 m long \u003cstrong\u003eStabila wooden folding rule\u003c\/strong\u003e with 10 segments as well as a \u003cstrong\u003echalk line reel with color powder\u003c\/strong\u003e and a 30 m line length.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCleaning and finishing tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor various tasks related to slab laying, the set includes an \u003cstrong\u003eArdex extra-quality tiler's sponge\u003c\/strong\u003e, a water brush, a coconut fiber hand brush, and a plasterer's cup.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tiler's sponge has a size of \u003cstrong\u003e170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The water brush features a bristle length of 90 mm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e600 × 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e16.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIncluded tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDesign \/ Dimension\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eClub hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 800 g, handle length 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eKnee pads, plastic, box form\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePointed chisel, import\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eØ 14 mm, length 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCold chisel, import\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eØ 14 mm, length 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eRubbing stone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e200 × 50 × 25 mm, grain 60\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHand brush, coconut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil, import\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 24 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWater brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBristle length 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's trowel, square, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBerner plastering trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eStucco chisel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade width 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eGrouting floats, foam rubber, soft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e280 × 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteel notched trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E4, blade size 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteel notched trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E6, blade size 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSteel notched trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E8, blade size 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's sponge, extra quality, Ardex\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlumb line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 20 m, Ø 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's rubber mallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 2, head 110 × 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's hammer, flat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 75 g, head 12 × 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's hammer, pointed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHead weight 75 g, head 12 × 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's chisel, pointed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 × 8 mm, length 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's chisel, flat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 × 8 mm, length 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSlab and glass cutter, Silberschnitt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 135 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's cutting and breaking pliers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTiler's nippers (parrot-beak pliers)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's dog\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm, Ø 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlumb bob\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight 300 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlates\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e46 × 46 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpirit level, Asphalt A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 400 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMason's and engineer's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 500 mm, width 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eNippers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 220 mm, version Top Extra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's cup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eØ 130 mm, height 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 segments, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSafety goggles incl. case\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHandsaw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSlotted screwdriver, FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize 3, blade width 5.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHacksaw with hand guard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eBlade 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eChalk line reel with color powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eLength 30 m, line Ø 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Tiler's Toolbox suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlab layers\u003c\/strong\u003e and tilers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTradespeople working in slab and tile installation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eConstruction sites requiring comprehensive tooling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eProfessional users needing a variety of tools for slab work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who wish to combine measuring, cutting, hammering, and laying tools in one toolbox\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Steinemann Tiler's Toolbox at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e for slab layers and tilers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eE4, E6, and E8 notched trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSilberschnitt slab and glass cutter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTiler's cutting and breaking pliers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTiler's nippers (parrot-beak pliers)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTiler's rubber mallet, as well as flat and pointed tiler's hammers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePointed and flat tiler's chisels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpirit level, mason's square, and plumb bob\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eArdex tiler's sponge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStabila wooden folding rule\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSafety goggles including case\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e16.6 kg total weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Steinemann Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the tiler's toolbox suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox is particularly suitable for slab layers and tilers, as well as tradespeople who perform slab and tile work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tiler's toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe toolbox has dimensions of 600 × 350 mm and a height of 300 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the toolbox?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified weight of the tiler's toolbox is 16.6 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich notched trowels are included in the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are three steel notched trowels with tooth patterns E4, E6, and E8. All three have a blade size of 280 × 130 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a slab cutter included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes a Silberschnitt slab and glass cutter with a length of 135 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre tiler's pliers included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u0026lt; div class=\"faq-content\"\u0026gt;\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The scope of delivery includes 210 mm tiler's cutting and breaking pliers and 200 mm tiler's nippers (parrot-beak pliers).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a rubber mallet included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes a size 2 tiler's rubber mallet with a 110 × 60 mm head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre measuring and alignment tools included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Among other items, an Asphalt A5 spirit level, a mason's and engineer's square, a plumb bob, a Stabila wooden folding rule, and a chalk line reel are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre safety goggles included in the tool set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Safety goggles including a case are part of the specified scope of delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat other tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe extensive scope of delivery includes, among other things, a club hammer, pointed chisel, cold chisel, rubbing stone, trowels, tiler's sponge, hammers, chisels, pliers, mason's square, handsaw, screwdriver, hacksaw, and other tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen ist die Plattenleger Werkzeugkiste geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Plattenleger und Fliesenleger sowie für Handwerker, die Platten- und Fliesenarbeiten ausführen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Plattenleger Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 600 × 350 mm und eine Höhe von 300 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Gewicht der Plattenleger Werkzeugkiste beträgt 16,6 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Zahnkellen sind im Set enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind drei Stahl-Zahnkellen mit den Zahnbildern E4, E6 und E8. Alle drei haben eine Blattgrösse von 280 × 130 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Plattenschneider enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Im Set ist ein Platten- und Glasschneider Silberschnitt mit einer Länge von 135 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Plattenlegerzangen enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehören eine Plattenleger-Schneid- und Brechzange mit 210 mm sowie eine Plattenleger-Lochzange (Papageienzange) mit 200 mm Länge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Gummihammer enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Set enthält einen Platten-Gummihammer der Grösse 2 mit einem Kopf von 110 × 60 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Werkzeuge zum Messen und Ausrichten enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Unter anderem sind eine Wasserwaage Asphalt A5, ein Maurer- und Schlosserwinkel, ein Senklot, ein Stabila Holz-Gliedermeter und ein Schlagschnurgerät enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Schutzbrille im Werkzeugset enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Eine Schutzbrille inklusive Etui gehört zum angegebenen Lieferumfang.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche weiteren Werkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Zum umfangreichen Lieferumfang gehören unter anderem Handfäustel, Spitzeisen, Schlageisen, Rutscherstein, Kellen, Plattenleger-Schwamm, Hämmer, Meissel, Zangen, Maurerwinkel, Handsäge, Schraubenzieher, Metallsägebogen und weitere Werkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Steinemann Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Tiler's Toolbox\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a comprehensive compilation of essential tools for slab layers and tilers. With \u003cstrong\u003eE4, E6, and E8 notched trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e, a slab cutter, tiler's pliers, hammers, chisels, a spirit level, a square, and other tools, versatile equipment for slab work is provided.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e For slab and tile work, having the right tools for laying, cutting, breaking, drilling, aligning, and finishing is crucial. A pre-compiled tool set simplifies preparation and ensures that many necessary tools are available directly at the workstation.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155387830619,"sku":"9.271","price":549.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Plattenleger-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann.jpg?v=1790087778"},{"product_id":"sanitaer-werkzeugkiste","title":"Plumbing Toolbox | 900 × 450 mm, 24.5 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePlumbing Tool Chest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpacious tool chest for plumbing, construction sites, and trade\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing tool chest\u003c\/strong\u003e, measuring \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e with a height of \u003cstrong\u003e450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e24.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, offers plenty of space for organizing and storing tools. It is particularly suitable for use in the \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing sector, on construction sites, and in trade\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 mm and 24.5 kg:\u003c\/strong\u003e The plumbing tool chest has a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of \u003cstrong\u003e450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. With a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e24.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers a spacious solution for tool organization in a professional work environment.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool chest for plumbing work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nDuring plumbing work, different tools are often required directly at the job site. A suitable tool chest allows the necessary equipment to be stored in an organized manner and made available at the respective workspace.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing tool chest\u003c\/strong\u003e has generous dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides a spacious foundation for storing tools in the plumbing trade as well as for other skilled craft activities.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSize 900 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e450 mm height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e24.5 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing and trade\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for construction sites and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor storing and organizing tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpacious dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of \u003cstrong\u003e450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the plumbing tool chest offers a generous size for tool storage. The overall dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGenerous tool chest:\u003c\/strong\u003e The dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e make the chest attractive for users who need more space for their tool inventory.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e24.5 kg net weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe stated net weight of the plumbing tool chest is \u003cstrong\u003e24.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. When planning transport, the weight of the tools stored inside should also be taken into account.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor plumbing, trade, and construction sites\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool chest is particularly suitable for use in the \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing trade\u003c\/strong\u003e. Furthermore, it can be used for various trade activities as well as for tool storage on construction sites and in workshops.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlumbing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWork on construction sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSkilled trade activities\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshop and work areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStorage and organization of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e900 × 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e24.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the plumbing tool chest at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e450 mm height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e24.5 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpacious solution for tool organization\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing and trade\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsable for construction site and workshop\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePlenty of space for individual tool equipment\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the plumbing tool chest\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the plumbing tool chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe plumbing tool chest has a size of 900 × 450 mm and a height of 450 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated net weight of the plumbing tool chest is 24.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the plumbing tool chest suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool chest is particularly suitable for plumbing installers and can also be used for various tasks in the skilled trades, on construction sites, and in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the tool chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 900 × 450 × 450 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool chest be used on construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The plumbing tool chest is suitable for organizing and storing tools in professional environments and on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool chest suitable for plumbing work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool chest is particularly suitable for use in the plumbing trade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the tool chest?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height of the plumbing tool chest is 450 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the footprint?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated footprint is 900 × 450 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool chest be used in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool chest can also be used in the workshop for storing and organizing tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the tool chest weigh without tools?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated net weight of the tool chest is 24.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Sanitär Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Sanitär Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 900 × 450 mm und eine Höhe von 450 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Eigengewicht der Sanitär Werkzeugkiste beträgt 24,5 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen eignet sich die Sanitär Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Sanitärinstallateure und kann auch für verschiedene Arbeiten im Handwerk, auf Baustellen und in der Werkstatt eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 900 × 450 × 450 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste auf Baustellen eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Sanitär Werkzeugkiste eignet sich zur Organisation und Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen im handwerklichen Umfeld und auf Baustellen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich die Werkzeugkiste für Sanitärarbeiten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste ist insbesondere für den Einsatz im Sanitärhandwerk geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Höhe der Sanitär Werkzeugkiste beträgt 450 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Grundfläche?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Grundfläche beträgt 900 × 450 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste in der Werkstatt verwendet werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste kann zur Aufbewahrung und Organisation von Werkzeugen auch in der Werkstatt verwendet werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel wiegt die Werkzeugkiste ohne Werkzeug?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Eigengewicht der Werkzeugkiste beträgt 24,5 kg.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder a plumbing tool chest\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eplumbing tool chest\u003c\/strong\u003e offers generous dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e900 × 450 × 450 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e for storing and organizing tools. With a weight of 24.5 kg, it is particularly suitable for plumbing installers as well as for use in the trades, on construction sites, and in the workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a large tool chest, you should consider not only the available storage space but also the total weight when fully loaded. Especially for frequent transport, a sensible selection and organization of tools is important.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155396186459,"sku":"9.272","price":499.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Sanit_C3_A4r-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087784"},{"product_id":"elektriker-werkzeugkiste","title":"Electrician's toolbox | 650 × 310 mm, 10.5 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElectrician's Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical tool box for electricians, construction sites, and workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c!--nl--p class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eelectrician's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e, with its dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of \u003cstrong\u003e330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e10.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, offers a practical solution for the storage and organization of tools. Its compact design is particularly well-suited for use in the \u003cstrong\u003eelectrical trade, on construction sites, and in workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 mm and 10.5 kg:\u003c\/strong\u003e The electrician's tool box combines a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e with a height of \u003cstrong\u003e330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. With a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e10.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it provides a compact base for organizing tools in day-to-day work.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for electricians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nClear tool storage is especially practical for electrical work, as various tools are often needed at the specific work location. The \u003cstrong\u003eelectrician's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for the storage and organization of tools and is suitable for use in the electrical trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 × 330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the tool box offers a compact form for different work areas. It can be used both on construction sites and in workshops.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSize 650 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e330 mm height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10.5 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eelectricians and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for construction sites and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor the storage and organization of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions for day-to-day work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe electrician's tool box has a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and is \u003cstrong\u003e330 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes it suitable for various work areas where tools need to be stored clearly and kept ready at the respective place of use.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions:\u003c\/strong\u003e The total measurements are \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 × 330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The specified weight of the tool box is \u003cstrong\u003e10.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10.5 kg weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith an empty weight of \u003cstrong\u003e10.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the electrician's tool box offers a compact solution for tool storage. When planning transport, the weight of the tools stored inside should also be taken into account.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor electricians and tradespeople\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool box is of particular interest for use in the \u003cstrong\u003eelectrical trade\u003c\/strong\u003e. Furthermore, it can be used for various craft activities, on construction sites, or in the workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eElectrical work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eConstruction site work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCraft activities\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshop and work areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStorage and organization of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e650 × 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBenefits of the electrician's tool box at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e330 mm height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10.5 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical solution for tool organization\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eelectricians and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsable on construction sites and in workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions for day-to-day work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the electrician's tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the electrician's tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe electrician's tool box has a size of 650 × 310 mm and a height of 330 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified weight of the electrician's tool box is 10.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the electrician's tool box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is particularly suitable for electricians and can also be used for various tasks in the trades, on construction sites, and in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 650 × 310 × 330 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used on construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The electrician's tool box is suitable for the organization and storage of tools in trade environments and on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box suitable for electrical work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is intended for use in the electrical trade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height of the electrician's tool box is 330 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the size of the footprint?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified footprint is 650 × 310 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box can also be used in the workshop for the storage and organization of tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the tool box weigh without tools?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified empty weight of the tool box is 10.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003c!--$1--\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrdering the electrician's tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e650 × 310 × 330 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a weight of 10.5 kg, the \u003cstrong\u003eelectrician's tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a compact solution for the storage and organization of tools. It is particularly suitable for electricians as well as for use on construction sites and in the workshop.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When selecting a tool box, you should consider the empty weight and required storage space in addition to the external dimensions. This allows you to plan your tool storage to fit your specific work area.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155403166043,"sku":"9.273","price":269.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Elektriker-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087789"},{"product_id":"dachdecker-werkzeugkiste","title":"Roofer's toolbox | 690 × 350 mm, 11 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRoofers' Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical tool box for roofers, construction sites, and trade use\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eroofers' tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e, with dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, a height of \u003cstrong\u003e350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e11 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, offers a practical solution for the storage and transport of tools. Its compact design is particularly well-suited for use in the \u003cstrong\u003eroofing trade, on construction sites, and in the workshop\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 mm and 11 kg:\u003c\/strong\u003e The roofers' tool box combines a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e with a height of \u003cstrong\u003e350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. With a weight of \u003cstrong\u003e11 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it provides a compact base for organizing tools in everyday work.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for roofers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWell-organized tool storage is important on construction sites, and especially for work performed on roofs. The \u003cstrong\u003eroofers' tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for the storage and organization of tools and can be used directly at the respective workplace.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the tool box offers a compact form for use in the roofing trade as well as for other skilled craft activities.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSize 690 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e350 mm height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e11 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eroofers, skilled trades, and construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor the clear storage and organization of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe roofers' tool box has a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and is \u003cstrong\u003e350 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes it possible to use the box in various work areas and for storing the necessary tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions:\u003c\/strong\u003e The overall dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The stated weight of the tool box is 11 kg.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e11 kg weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith an empty weight of \u003cstrong\u003e11 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the roofers' tool box is among the more compact tool boxes. The weight should be taken into account when planning transport and when assembling the tools to be stored within it.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor roofers and tradespeople\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool box is especially attractive for use in the \u003cstrong\u003eroofing trade\u003c\/strong\u003e. Furthermore, it can be used wherever tools need to be stored in an organized manner and taken to the respective place of work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eRoofing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWork on construction sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSkilled craft activities\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshop and work areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eStorage and organization of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e11 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the roofers' tool box at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e footprint\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e350 mm height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e11 kg weight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003ePractical solution for tool organization\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003eroofers and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCan be used for construction sites and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions for daily work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the roofers' tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the roofers' tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe roofers' tool box has a size of 690 × 350 mm and a height of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated weight of the roofers' tool box is 11 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWho is the roofers' tool box suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is particularly suitable for roofers and can also be used for various tasks in the skilled trades, on construction sites, and in the workshop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 690 × 350 × 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used on construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The roofers' tool box is suitable for the organization and storage of tools in a trade environment and on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box suitable for roofing work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is intended for use in the roofing trade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe height of the roofers' tool box is 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the size of the footprint?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated footprint is 690 × 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be used in the workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box can also be used in the workshop for storing and organizing tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the tool box weigh without tools?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated empty weight of the tool box is 11 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 690 × 350 mm und eine Höhe von 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Gewicht der Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste beträgt 11 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für wen eignet sich die Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste eignet sich insbesondere für Dachdecker und kann auch für verschiedene Arbeiten im Handwerk, auf Baustellen und in der Werkstatt eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 690 × 350 × 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste auf Baustellen eingesetzt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste ist für die Organisation und Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen im handwerklichen Umfeld und auf Baustellen geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich die Werkzeugkiste für Dachdeckerarbeiten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste ist für den Einsatz im Dachdeckerhandwerk vorgesehen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Höhe der Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste beträgt 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Grundfläche?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Grundfläche beträgt 690 × 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Werkzeugkiste in der Werkstatt verwendet werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste kann zur Aufbewahrung und Organisation von Werkzeugen auch in der Werkstatt verwendet werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel wiegt die Werkzeugkiste ohne Werkzeug?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Eigengewicht der Werkzeugkiste beträgt 11 kg.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder roofers' tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eroofers' tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e, with \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a weight of 11 kg, offers a compact solution for storing and organizing tools. It is especially suitable for roofers as well as for use on construction sites and in the skilled trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When selecting a tool box, in addition to the external dimensions, you should also consider the weight and the actual storage space required. This helps prevent the box from being too small or unnecessarily heavy for the intended tool set.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155410833755,"sku":"9.274","price":369.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Dachdecker-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087795"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-hy-227-10-50v","title":"Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/50V | 2 HP, 10 bar, 50 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompressor with 50-liter tank, 2 hp and 10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compressor with a generous \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e2 hp \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and maintenance-free design features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank and 10 bar:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V combines a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e2 hp \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e of power and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The compressor is oil-lubricated and, according to the technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 50-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/strong\u003e features a 50-liter compressed air tank. The larger tank provides a correspondingly larger reservoir of compressed air and is of interest to users who value a higher tank volume in a compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades. The dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e340 × 340 × 870 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 hp \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar or 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. This gives the compressor a high maximum pressure for various compressed air applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The stated maximum pressure is 10 bar \/ 145 PSI. Which specific compressed air tools can be used also depends on the respective air requirement and the effective delivery rate.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed with oil lubrication. According to the available technical specifications, the compressor is \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated construction is therefore part of the specified technical equipment of this model.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 hp \/ 1.5 kW power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor has an output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 hp or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The specified speed is \u003cstrong\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Together with the 50-liter tank and the maximum pressure of 10 bar, this forms the technical basis for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for workshops and trades\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This means the device can be operated on a corresponding 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V is designed for operation on a corresponding \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e50 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 hp \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOil-lubricated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eYes, maintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e340 × 340 × 870 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e10-bar compressor with a 50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshops for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTradespeople in need of a compressor with a larger tank volume\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who prefer a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter compressed air reservoir\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAreas of application with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003eoil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 hp \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAccording to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDimensions of 340 × 340 × 870 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the tank of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V features a 50-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has an output of 2 hp or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure is 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V oil-lubricated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V is designed with oil lubrication.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In the provided technical specifications, the compressor is stated to be oil-lubricated and maintenance-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power supply does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz and requires a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 340 × 340 × 870 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat kind of work is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V is suitable for various compressed air tasks. Which specific compressed air tools can be used depends on the respective air requirement and the effective delivery rate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does 145 PSI mean for the Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e145 PSI is approximately equivalent to 10 bar. The maximum pressure of the compressor is stated as 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V verfügt über einen 50-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck beträgt 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V ölgeschmiert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V ist ölgeschmiert ausgeführt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V wartungsfrei?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. In den vorliegenden technischen Angaben wird der Kompressor als ölgeschmiert und wartungsfrei angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz und benötigt einen entsprechenden 230-V-Anschluss.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 340 × 340 × 870 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf und der effektiven Liefermenge ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet 145 PSI beim Stanley HY 227\/10\/50V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"145 PSI entsprechen ungefähr 10 bar. Der maximale Druck des Kompressors wird mit 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI angegeben.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrdering the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/50V\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with 2 hp \/ 1.5 kW of power and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and, according to the technical specifications, maintenance-free design, as well as the 230 V \/ 50 Hz motor, complete the equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When selecting a compressor, one should consider not only the tank volume and maximum pressure but also the requirements of the compressed air tool being used. For specific suitability, the effective delivery rate is particularly decisive.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155438948699,"sku":"9.282","price":429.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-HY-227_10_50V.jpg?v=1790087817"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-hy-227-10-30v","title":"Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/30V | 2 HP, 10 bar, 30 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompressor with 30-liter tank, 2 HP and 10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compressor with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, a \u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and maintenance-free model features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank and 10 bar:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V combines a \u003cstrong\u003e30-liter compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power and \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure. The compressor is oil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 30-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/strong\u003e has a 30-liter compressed air tank. The stored compressed air is available for connected pneumatic applications and supplements the output of the 2 HP compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its \u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, this model offers a larger compressed air reservoir than compact compressors with small tank volumes. The dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e325 × 315 × 810 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar or 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides the compressor with high maximum pressure for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The specified maximum pressure is 10 bar \/ 145 PSI. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends additionally on the respective air consumption and the effective delivery rate.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed as an oil-lubricated unit. According to the available technical specifications, the compressor is \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated design is therefore part of the technical features of this model.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor has an output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The specified speed is \u003cstrong\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Together with the 30-liter tank and the maximum pressure of 10 bar, this forms the technical basis for various pneumatic applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for various applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V has a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the device to be operated via an appropriate 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V is designed for operation with an appropriate \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e30 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOil-lubricated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eYes, maintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e325 × 315 × 810 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e10-bar compressor with a 30-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshops for various pneumatic tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTradespeople needing a compressor with a larger tank volume\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who prefer a \u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAreas of application with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003eoil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e version\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBenefits of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAccording to technical specifications \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDimensions of 325 × 315 × 810 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V has a 30-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has an output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure is 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V oil-lubricated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V is an oil-lubricated unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The provided technical specifications state that the compressor is oil-lubricated and maintenance-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz and requires a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 325 × 315 × 810 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V is suitable for various pneumatic tasks. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends on the respective air consumption and the effective delivery rate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does 145 PSI mean for the Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e145 PSI is approximately 10 bar. The maximum pressure of the compressor is specified as 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V verfügt über einen 30-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck beträgt 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V ölgeschmiert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V ist ölgeschmiert ausgeführt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V wartungsfrei?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. In den vorliegenden technischen Angaben wird der Kompressor als ölgeschmiert und wartungsfrei angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz und benötigt einen entsprechenden 230-V-Anschluss.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 325 × 315 × 810 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf und der effektiven Liefermenge ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet 145 PSI beim Stanley HY 227\/10\/30V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"145 PSI entsprechen ungefähr 10 bar. Der maximale Druck des Kompressors wird mit 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI angegeben.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/30V\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a \u003cstrong\u003e30-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, maintenance-free design, as well as the 230 V \/ 50 Hz motor, complete its features.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing a compressor, you should consider not only the tank volume and maximum pressure but also the requirements of the pneumatic tool being used. For specific suitability, the effective delivery rate is particularly crucial.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155442946395,"sku":"9.283","price":349.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-HY-227_10_30V.jpg?v=1790087822"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-hy-227-10-12v","title":"Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/12V | 2 HP, 10 bar, 12 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact 10-bar compressor with a 12-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact compressor with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, a \u003cstrong\u003e12-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and maintenance-free design features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-liter tank and 10 bar:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V combines a \u003cstrong\u003e12-liter compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power and \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure. The compressor is oil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 12-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/strong\u003e features a 12-liter compressed air tank. The stored compressed air is available for connected pneumatic applications and complements the performance of the 2 HP compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e520 × 255 × 470 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the model combines a 12-liter tank with a relatively compact design.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e12-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar or 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides the compressor with a high maximum pressure for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V reaches up to 10 bar \/ 145 PSI. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends additionally on the respective air requirement and the effective delivery rate.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/strong\u003e is oil-lubricated. According to the available technical specifications, the compressor is \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated design is therefore part of the specified technical equipment of this model.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor has a power output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The specified speed is \u003cstrong\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Together with the 12-liter tank and the maximum pressure of 10 bar, this forms the technical basis for various pneumatic applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for various applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V has a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. The device can therefore be operated at a corresponding 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V is designed for operation with a corresponding \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e12 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOil-lubricated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eYes, maintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e520 × 255 × 470 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact 10-bar compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshops for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTradespeople in need of a compressor with a 12-liter tank\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who prefer a \u003cstrong\u003e12-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eApplications with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003eoil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBenefits of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e12-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAccording to technical specifications \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eDimensions of 520 × 255 × 470 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V has a 12-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the power of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a power output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure is 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V oil-lubricated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V is oil-lubricated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In the available technical specifications, the compressor is stated as oil-lubricated and maintenance-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz and requires a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 520 × 255 × 470 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V is suitable for various compressed air tasks. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends on the respective air requirement and the effective delivery rate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does 145 PSI mean for the Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e145 PSI is approximately equivalent to 10 bar. The maximum pressure of the compressor is specified as 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V verfügt über einen 12-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck beträgt 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V ölgeschmiert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V ist ölgeschmiert ausgeführt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V wartungsfrei?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. In den vorliegenden technischen Angaben wird der Kompressor als ölgeschmiert und wartungsfrei angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz und benötigt einen entsprechenden 230-V-Anschluss.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 520 × 255 × 470 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf und der effektiven Liefermenge ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet 145 PSI beim Stanley HY 227\/10\/12V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"145 PSI entsprechen ungefähr 10 bar. Der maximale Druck des Kompressors wird mit 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI angegeben.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/12V\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a \u003cstrong\u003e12-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, maintenance-free design, as well as the 230 V \/ 50 Hz motor, round out the equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When selecting a compressor, in addition to tank volume and maximum pressure, the requirements of the pneumatic tool being used should also be taken into account. For specific suitability, the effective delivery rate is particularly decisive.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155451498843,"sku":"9.284","price":299.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-HY-227_10_12.jpg?v=1790087827"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-hy-227-8-6e","title":"Stanley Compressor HY 227\/8\/6E | 2 HP, 8 bar, 6 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact 8-bar compressor with 6-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact compressor with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, a \u003cstrong\u003e6-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and maintenance-free design features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact and versatile:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E combines \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power with a \u003cstrong\u003e6-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure. The compressor is oil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 6-litre tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/strong\u003e features a 6-litre compressed air tank. The stored compressed air is available for connected pneumatic applications. Due to its compact dimensions, the model is suitable for various areas of application where a handy compressor is required.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tank provides a compressed air reservoir and complements the 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power. The maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e6-litre tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar or 116 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides a maximum pressure suitable for numerous compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The stated maximum pressure is 8 bar \/ 116 PSI. Which pneumatic tools can be operated with the compressor also depends on the respective air consumption and the effective delivery rate.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/strong\u003e is oil-lubricated. According to the available technical specifications, the compressor is \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated design is therefore part of the specified technical equipment of this model.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a power of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E is designed for various compressed air tasks. The speed is \u003cstrong\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for various applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the device to be operated via a corresponding 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E is designed for operation with a corresponding \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e6 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOil-lubricated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eYes, maintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e440 × 230 × 425 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact 8-bar compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eWorkshops for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTradespeople needing a small compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who prefer a \u003cstrong\u003e6-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eApplication areas with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003eoil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e6-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAccording to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 440 × 230 × 425 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E features a 6-litre compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a power of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure is 8 bar or 116 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E oil-lubricated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E is oil-lubricated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. According to the available technical specifications, the compressor is oil-lubricated and maintenance-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor features a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz and requires a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 440 × 230 × 425 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E is suitable for various compressed air tasks. Which pneumatic tools can be specifically used depends on the respective air demand and the effective delivery rate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does 116 PSI mean for the Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e116 PSI is approximately 8 bar. The maximum pressure of the compressor is stated as 8 bar or 116 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E verfügt über einen 6-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck beträgt 8 bar beziehungsweise 116 PSI.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E ölgeschmiert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E ist ölgeschmiert ausgeführt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E wartungsfrei?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. In den vorliegenden technischen Angaben wird der Kompressor als ölgeschmiert und wartungsfrei angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz und benötigt einen entsprechenden 230-V-Anschluss.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 440 × 230 × 425 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf und der effektiven Liefermenge ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet 116 PSI beim Stanley HY 227\/8\/6E?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"116 PSI entsprechen ungefähr 8 bar. Der maximale Druck des Kompressors wird mit 8 bar beziehungsweise 116 PSI angegeben.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/8\/6E\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a compact design with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, a \u003cstrong\u003e6-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar \/ 116 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure. The oil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, maintenance-free design, along with the 230 V \/ 50 Hz motor, complete the equipment.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing a compressor, in addition to tank size and maximum pressure, you should primarily consider the air demand of the pneumatic tool being used. The decisive factor here is the effective delivery rate of the compressor, not just the motor power.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155457593691,"sku":"9.285","price":249.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-HY-227_8_6E.jpg?v=1790087833"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-hy-227-10-5","title":"Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/5 | 2 HP, 10 bar, 5 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/5\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact 10-bar compressor with 5-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact compressor with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, a \u003cstrong\u003e5-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated and maintenance-free compressor features a 230 V \/ 50 Hz motor and is suitable for various compressed air tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact and powerful:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 combines \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power with a \u003cstrong\u003e5-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure. According to technical specifications, the oil-lubricated design is \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 5-litre tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e features a 5-litre compressed air tank, designed for a compact form factor. The tank stores the generated compressed air and provides it for connected compressed air applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith its compact dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e410 × 360 × 325 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the model is suitable for areas of application where a small compressor with high maximum pressure is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5-litre tank capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated and, according to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar or 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e. This gives the compressor a high maximum pressure for numerous compressed air applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The stated maximum pressure is 10 bar \/ 145 PSI. Which compressed air tools can be operated with the compressor also depends on the respective air consumption and the effective delivery rate.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley HY 227\/10\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed to be oil-lubricated. According to the available technical specifications, the model is \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e. The oil-lubricated design is thus explicitly part of the technical equipment of this compressor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has an output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The speed is \u003cstrong\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Together with the 5-litre tank and the maximum pressure of 10 bar, this forms the technical foundation for the intended compressed air tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for various applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 is equipped with a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the model to be operated from a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e230 V:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 requires a corresponding \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz connection\u003c\/strong\u003e and is therefore suitable for locations where such a power supply is available.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e5 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOil-lubricated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, maintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e410 × 360 × 325 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact 10-bar compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWorkshops for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTradespeople needing a small compressed air compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUsers who prefer a \u003cstrong\u003e5-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApplications with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003eoil-lubricated and maintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e model\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar \/ 145 PSI\u003c\/strong\u003e maximum pressure\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOil-lubricated design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAccording to technical specifications, \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 410 × 360 × 325 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor HY 227\/10\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 features a 5-litre compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has an output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure is 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 oil-lubricated?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 is of oil-lubricated design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In the available technical specifications, the compressor is stated to be oil-lubricated and maintenance-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz and requires a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated speed is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 410 × 360 × 325 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 is suitable for various compressed air tasks. Which specific compressed air tools can be used depends on the respective air demand and the effective delivery rate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does 145 PSI mean for the Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e145 PSI corresponds to approximately 10 bar. The maximum pressure of the compressor is stated as 10 bar or 145 PSI.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 verfügt über einen 5-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck beträgt 10 bar beziehungsweise 145 PSI.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 ölgeschmiert?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 ist ölgeschmiert ausgeführt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5 wartungsfrei?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. In den vorliegenden technischen Angaben wird der Kompressor als ölgeschmiert und wartungsfrei angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz und benötigt einen entsprechenden 230-V-Anschluss.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley HY 227\/10\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\"\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155463033179,"sku":"9.286","price":299.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-HY-227_10_5.jpg?v=1790087838"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-dv2-400-10-50","title":"Stanley Compressor DV2 400\/10\/50 | 3 hp, 10 bar, 50 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompressor with 50-liter tank, 3 HP and 10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e is a high-performance compressor with \u003cstrong\u003e3 HP \/ 2.2 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an intake capacity of 356 l\/min, the model provides high air intake for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades. It operates on \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e3 HP and 356 l\/min:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 combines a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with 3 HP \/ 2.2 kW power, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e and a stated intake capacity of 356 l\/min.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 50-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e features a 50-liter compressed air tank. The stored compressed air is available for connected pneumatic applications, making the compressor an interesting choice for various tasks in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe 50-liter tank represents a good compromise between tank volume and the compact dimensions of the device. The maximum operating pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e3 HP \/ 2.2 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e356 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e356 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a stated \u003cstrong\u003eintake capacity of 356 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 can draw in a correspondingly large volume of air. This makes the model suitable for various compressed air tasks, although the specific suitability always depends on the air requirement of the pneumatic tool being used.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e The intake capacity of 356 l\/min is not synonymous with the effective delivery rate. When selecting a compressor, the air requirement of the respective pneumatic tool should therefore be compared with the actual delivery rate of the compressor.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e3 HP \/ 2.2 kW power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 has a power output of \u003cstrong\u003e3 HP or 2.2 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. Together with the 50-liter tank and the intake capacity of 356 l\/min, this forms the technical foundation for various compressed air applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides a maximum pressure suitable for numerous pneumatic applications. Which tools can actually be used also depends on their air consumption and the effective delivery rate.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for workshops and trades\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor is equipped with a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 suitable for locations with a corresponding 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical:\u003c\/strong\u003e Despite its power of 3 HP \/ 2.2 kW, the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 operates at \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This means no 400 V connection is required.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e50 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3 HP \/ 2.2 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2850 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eIntake capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e356 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e410 × 360 × 325 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e with varying compressed air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTrade businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who require \u003cstrong\u003e3 HP \/ 2.2 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eApplication areas with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBenefits of the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for stored compressed air\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e3 HP \/ 2.2 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e356 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 410 × 360 × 325 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various compressed air tasks in workshop and trade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 features a 50-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a power output of 3 HP or 2.2 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 is 10 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the intake capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated intake capacity is 356 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz and thus requires a corresponding 230 V connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed of the compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated speed is 2850 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions of the compressor are 410 × 360 × 325 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is this compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades. Which pneumatic tools can specifically be used depends on the respective air requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 suitable for 230 V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does an intake capacity of 356 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe intake capacity refers to the volume of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery rate available to a pneumatic tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 verfügt über einen 50-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 3 PS beziehungsweise 2,2 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 beträgt 10 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 356 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz und benötigt somit einen entsprechenden 230-V-Anschluss.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl des Kompressors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 2850 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen des Kompressors betragen 410 × 360 × 325 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley DV2 400\/10\/50 für 230 V geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 356 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley DV2 400\/10\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e offers 3 HP \/ 2.2 kW of power, a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e and 356 l\/min intake capacity. The 230 V motor enables operation with a corresponding 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing a compressor, one should not only look at motor power or tank size. Decisive for choosing the right model is, in particular, the air requirement of the pneumatic tool being used. Compare this with the effective delivery rate of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155466539355,"sku":"9.287","price":499.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-DV2-400_10_50.jpg?v=1790087844"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-b251-10-100-230v","title":"Stanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 230V | 100 l, 10 bar","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 230V\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompressor with 100-liter tank, 10 bar and 230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 230V\u003c\/strong\u003e is a high-performance compressor with a generous \u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air displacement of 255 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade. It operates on \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley B251\/10\/100 offers a generous \u003cstrong\u003e100 l compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e255 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e – combined with a 230 V connection.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 100-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley B251\/10\/100\u003c\/strong\u003e features a large 100-liter compressed air tank. The stored compressed air is available for connected pneumatic applications, making the model an interesting choice for regular work in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its \u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, the B251\/10\/100 is one of the larger models within the Stanley compressor series. The maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e255 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1250 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e255 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 reaches a stated \u003cstrong\u003eair displacement of 255 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the compressor suitable for various compressed air tasks, depending on the respective air consumption of the tool being used.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant when choosing:\u003c\/strong\u003e The air displacement of 255 l\/min is not to be equated with the effective delivery rate. For pneumatic tools, the actual air consumption should therefore always be compared with the compressor's available air delivery.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley B251\/10\/100 offers a pressure range suitable for many pneumatic applications. Which tools can be used also depends on their air consumption and the effective delivery rate of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e230 V compressor for workshops and trade\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley B251\/10\/100 230V\u003c\/strong\u003e features a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the model to be operated on a corresponding 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 230 V version is an interesting choice for users who need a large \u003cstrong\u003e100-liter compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e and work with 230 V at the intended place of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePowerful 2 HP compressor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor has a power output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. Together with the 100-liter tank and the 255 l\/min air displacement, this forms the technical basis for various pneumatic applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e100 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir displacement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e255 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1025 × 435 × 845 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley B251\/10\/100 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e with regular compressed air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTrade businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e100-liter compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers needing a \u003cstrong\u003e10-bar compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAreas of application with a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley B251\/10\/100 230V at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for a large compressed air reservoir\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e255 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1250 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 230V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley B251\/10\/100?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 has a 100-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley B251\/10\/100 have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a power output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley B251\/10\/100 is 10 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the air displacement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated air displacement is 255 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley B251\/10\/100 230V require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 230 V version has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the compressor's speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated speed is 1250 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley B251\/10\/100?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions of the compressor are 1025 × 435 × 845 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends on the respective air consumption.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley B251\/10\/100 suitable for 230 V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. This version is designed for a motor connection of 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does the air displacement of 255 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe air displacement refers to the amount of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery rate available to a pneumatic tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley B251\/10\/100 verfügt über einen 100-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley B251\/10\/100 beträgt 10 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 255 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley B251\/10\/100 230V?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die 230-V-Ausführung verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl des Kompressors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 1250 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen des Kompressors betragen 1025 × 435 × 845 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley B251\/10\/100 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley B251\/10\/100 für 230 V geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Diese Ausführung ist für einen Motoranschluss von 230 V \/ 50 Hz ausgelegt.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 255 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder Stanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 230V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley B251\/10\/100 230V\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a generous 100-liter tank with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e and 255 l\/min air displacement. The 230 V connection makes it the suitable choice for locations with a corresponding power supply.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a 100-liter compressor, in addition to the tank volume, the air consumption of the desired pneumatic tool should also be taken into account. The deciding factor here is the effective delivery rate, not just the stated air displacement.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155471651163,"sku":"9.288","price":749.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-B251_10_100-230V.jpg?v=1790087850"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-b251-10-100-400v","title":"Stanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 400V | 100 l, 10 bar","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 400V\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional compressor with a 100-liter tank, 2 cylinders, and 10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 400V\u003c\/strong\u003e is a powerful compressor with a generous \u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e2 cylinders\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With a motor output of 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW and an intake capacity of 255 l\/min, the compressor is particularly well-suited for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade environments.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank capacity:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley B251\/10\/100 combines a large \u003cstrong\u003e100 l compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e2 cylinders\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003e255 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor operates at \u003cstrong\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with a 100-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley B251\/10\/100\u003c\/strong\u003e features a generous 100-liter compressed air tank. The tank stores the compressed air generated by the compressor, thereby providing a larger compressed air reservoir for connected applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe large tank is particularly attractive for applications where compressed air is required regularly. The maximum operating pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2 cylinders\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e motor output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e255 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1250 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2-cylinder compressor for workshops and trade\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 operates with \u003cstrong\u003e2 cylinders\u003c\/strong\u003e. In combination with the 100-liter tank, the device provides a suitable foundation for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade environments.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWhich compressed air tools can be operated with the compressor depends on the respective air requirement and the effective delivery volume.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e255 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe specified \u003cstrong\u003eintake capacity is 255 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the Stanley B251\/10\/100 suitable for various applications where compressed air is required.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e The intake capacity of 255 l\/min should not be equated with the effective delivery volume. Therefore, the actual air requirement of any compressed air tool should always be taken into account when choosing one.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley B251\/10\/100\u003c\/strong\u003e reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. The device thus offers a maximum pressure relevant to many compressed air applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWhen choosing a suitable compressed air tool, not only the maximum pressure but also the required air consumption and the effective delivery volume of the compressor should be considered.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e400 V connection\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 is equipped with a motor for \u003cstrong\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the model particularly suited for areas of application where an appropriate 400 V connection is available.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlease note:\u003c\/strong\u003e Before purchasing, you should check whether a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e400 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e is available at the intended place of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEfficient operation at 1250 rpm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor operates at a speed of \u003cstrong\u003e1250 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The combination of 2 cylinders, a 100-liter tank, and a 255 l\/min intake capacity makes the Stanley B251\/10\/100 an interesting solution for regular compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e100 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eCylinders\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eIntake capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e255 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1025 × 435 × 845 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley B251\/10\/100 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e with regular compressed air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTrade businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e with corresponding air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e100-liter compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who require a \u003cstrong\u003e10-bar compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eAreas of application with an existing \u003cstrong\u003e400 V connection\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley B251\/10\/100 at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e100-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for a large compressed air reservoir\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2 cylinders\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e255 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1250 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor B251\/10\/100\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the tank of the Stanley B251\/10\/100?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 features a 100-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow many cylinders does the Stanley B251\/10\/100 have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor is equipped with 2 cylinders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the output of the Stanley compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley B251\/10\/100 is 10 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the intake capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified intake capacity is 255 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley B251\/10\/100 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 400 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed of the compressor is 1250 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Stanley B251\/10\/100?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 1025 × 435 × 845 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat kind of work is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley B251\/10\/100 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade. Which specific compressed air tools can be used depends on the respective air requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does the intake capacity of 255 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe intake capacity refers to the volume of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery volume available to a compressed air tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley B251\/10\/100 verfügt über einen 100-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viele Zylinder hat der Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor ist mit 2 Zylindern ausgestattet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley B251\/10\/100 beträgt 10 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 255 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 400 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl des Kompressors beträgt 1250 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley B251\/10\/100?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 1025 × 435 × 845 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley B251\/10\/100 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 255 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor B251\/10\/100 400V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley B251\/10\/100\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a generous 100-liter tank with 2 cylinders, 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW output, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and 255 l\/min intake capacity. With its 400 V motor, it is particularly suitable for workshops and trade businesses with the corresponding power connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e For a 100-liter compressor, the actual delivery volume is just as crucial as the tank capacity when choosing compressed air tools. Therefore, always check the air consumption of the desired tool and compare it with the available delivery volume of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155480432987,"sku":"9.289","price":749.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-B251_10_100-400V.jpg?v=1790087855"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-air-boss-dn200-10-5","title":"Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 | Compressor 10 bar, 5 l","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 Compressor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact 1.5 HP compressor with 5-liter tank and 10 bar pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e features a \u003cstrong\u003e5-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, a motor output of \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP or 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air displacement of 180 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops, trade, and DIY projects.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 combines a \u003cstrong\u003e5 l tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e motor output, a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e. It operates on 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley Air Boss with 5-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e is equipped with a 5-liter compressed air tank. The tank stores the compressed air generated by the compressor, thereby providing a volume of compressed air for connected applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its compact 5-liter tank, this model is particularly suitable for applications that require a \u003cstrong\u003espace-saving compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e with higher maximum pressure. The maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nA special feature of the \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e is its maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the compressor to offer a higher maximum pressure than many comparable 8 bar models.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nMaximum pressure should be specifically considered when selecting a compressed air tool. However, the deciding factor is not just the pressure, but also the required air consumption of the respective tool.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e A maximum pressure of 10 bar does not automatically mean that every compressed air tool can be operated with this compressor. Always check the technical requirements of the connected tool.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 reaches a stated \u003cstrong\u003eair displacement of 180 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This gives the unit a solid foundation for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAir displacement is not free air delivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e The stated air displacement of 180 l\/min is not to be equated with the effective free air delivery. Therefore, the actual air consumption of a compressed air tool should always be taken into account when selecting one.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor is equipped with a motor that has an output of \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP or 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor operates at \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a speed of 3400 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis allows the Stanley Air Boss to be operated via a standard 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact design\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e430 × 400 × 210 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 features a compact design. This makes the model particularly suitable for users looking for a space-saving compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e5 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e10 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir displacement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e430 × 400 × 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for applications with the appropriate air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e in need of a compact 10 bar compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e using compressed air\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e5-liter, 10 bar compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who require a \u003cstrong\u003e230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley Air Boss at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e5-liter tank\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW motor output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e of 430 × 400 × 210 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various compressed air applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 compressor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the size of the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 tank?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 features a 5-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the output of the Stanley Air Boss?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 1.5 HP or 1.1 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 is 10 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the air displacement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated air displacement is 180 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat kind of power connection does the Stanley Air Boss require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor features a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated speed of the compressor is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 430 × 400 × 210 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat kind of work is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops, trade, and DIY. Which specific compressed air tools can be used depends on their respective air requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley Air Boss a 10 bar compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The maximum pressure of the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 is 10 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does an air displacement of 180 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAir displacement refers to the volume of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective free air delivery available to a compressed air tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 verfügt über einen 5-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Air Boss?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 1,5 PS beziehungsweise 1,1 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 beträgt 10 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 180 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley Air Boss?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl des Kompressors beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 430 × 400 × 210 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt, Handwerk und beim Heimwerken. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley Air Boss ein 10-bar-Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der maximale Druck des Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 beträgt 10 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 180 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5 compressor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Air Boss DN200\/10\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a compact 5-liter tank with 1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW output, \u003cstrong\u003e10 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and 180 l\/min air displacement. This provides a compact compressed air solution for various tasks in workshops, trade, and DIY.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When selecting a compressor, do not just look at the maximum pressure. The air consumption of the desired compressed air tool is also critical. Compare this with the actual free air delivery of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155490427227,"sku":"9.290","price":189.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-AirBoss-DN200_10_5.jpg?v=1790087861"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-d210-8-50","title":"Stanley Air Compressor D210\/8\/50 | 50 l, 8 bar, 222 l\/min","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor D210\/8\/50\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP compressor with 50-liter tank and 8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor D210\/8\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e features a generous \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, an engine output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air displacement of 222 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter compressed air volume:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley D210\/8\/50 combines a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e engine output, \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e. It operates on 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 50-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley D210\/8\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e is equipped with a 50-liter compressed air tank. The larger tank stores the compressed air generated by the compressor, thus providing an appropriate volume of compressed air for connected applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe 50-liter tank makes the model particularly interesting for applications where a larger compressed air reservoir is desired. The maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley D210\/8\/50 reaches a specified \u003cstrong\u003eair displacement of 222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This gives the compressor a solid foundation for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e The specified air displacement of 222 l\/min should not be equated with the effective air delivery rate. Therefore, when choosing a pneumatic tool, its actual air requirement should always be considered.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/50 has a motor with an output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor is operated at \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a speed of 2850 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis provides a powerful basis for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley D210\/8\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. This value is an important factor when selecting suitable pneumatic tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to the maximum pressure, the required air volume of the connected tool should be particularly considered.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e50-liter compressor for workshops and trade\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThanks to the \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley D210\/8\/50 offers a larger compressed air reservoir than compact compressors with smaller tanks. This makes the model interesting for workshop tasks and applications where compressed air is needed regularly.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe actual suitability for a specific pneumatic tool depends on the air requirement of the tool and the effective delivery rate of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e50 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2850 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir displacement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e770 × 310 × 640 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley D210\/8\/50 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e with a need for a larger compressed air tank\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable compressed air applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e with corresponding air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for a \u003cstrong\u003e50-liter compressor with 8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who prefer a compressor with \u003cstrong\u003e230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley compressor at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e50-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for a larger compressed air reservoir\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW engine output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eFor various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 770 × 310 × 640 mm for a 50-liter compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/50\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley D210\/8\/50?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley D210\/8\/50 features a 50-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the power of the Stanley compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley D210\/8\/50 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the air displacement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified air displacement is 222 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley D210\/8\/50 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor features a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the rotational speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed of the compressor is 2850 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley D210\/8\/50?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 770 × 310 × 640 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley D210\/8\/50 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade. Which pneumatic tools can be specifically used depends on the respective air requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley D210\/8\/50 an 8-bar compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The maximum pressure of the Stanley D210\/8\/50 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does the air displacement of 222 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAir displacement refers to the volume of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery rate available to a pneumatic tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley D210\/8\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley D210\/8\/50 verfügt über einen 50-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley D210\/8\/50 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 222 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley D210\/8\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl des Kompressors beträgt 2850 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley D210\/8\/50?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 770 × 310 × 640 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley D210\/8\/50 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley D210\/8\/50 ein 8-bar-Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der maximale Druck des Stanley D210\/8\/50 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 222 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/50\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley D210\/8\/50\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a generous 50-liter tank with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power, 8 bar maximum pressure, and 222 l\/min air displacement. This offers a versatile compressed air solution for various tasks in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing a compressor, both the maximum pressure and the available air volume are decisive. Therefore, check the air requirement of your desired pneumatic tool and compare it with the effective air delivery rate of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155499536731,"sku":"9.291","price":429.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-D210_8_50.jpg?v=1790087866"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-d210-8-24","title":"Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/24 | 24 l, 8 bar, 222 l\/min","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor D210\/8\/24\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP compressor with 24-liter tank and 8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor D210\/8\/24\u003c\/strong\u003e features a \u003cstrong\u003e24-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, a motor output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air intake capacity of 222 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowerful compressed air solution:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley D210\/8\/24 combines a \u003cstrong\u003e24-l tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e motor output, \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e. It operates on 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 24-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley D210\/8\/24\u003c\/strong\u003e is equipped with a 24-liter compressed air tank. The tank stores the compressed air generated by the compressor, thereby providing a volume of compressed air for connected applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its 24-liter tank, the compressor offers a practical combination of tank volume and compact design. The maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e24-liter tank capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley D210\/8\/24 achieves a rated \u003cstrong\u003eair intake capacity of 222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides a solid foundation for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e The specified air intake capacity of 222 l\/min is not to be equated with the effective air delivery volume. Therefore, the actual air consumption of a pneumatic tool should always be taken into account when selecting one.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/24 features a motor with an output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor runs on \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a speed of 2850 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis provides a powerful basis for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley D210\/8\/24\u003c\/strong\u003e reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. Maximum pressure is an important technical value when selecting the appropriate pneumatic tool.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to the maximum pressure, the required air volume of the connected tool should be taken into particular account.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe dimensions of the Stanley D210\/8\/24 are \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 255 × 455 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the compressor to offer a 24-liter tank volume in a comparatively compact design.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e24 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2850 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir intake capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e570 × 255 × 455 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley D210\/8\/24 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e needing a 24-liter compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable compressed air applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e with corresponding compressed air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar compressor with 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley compressor at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e24-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for compressed air\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e of 570 × 255 × 455 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various applications in workshops and trades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/24\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley D210\/8\/24?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley D210\/8\/24 features a 24-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley compressor have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley D210\/8\/24 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the air intake capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified air intake capacity is 222 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley D210\/8\/24 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed of the compressor is 2850 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley D210\/8\/24?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 570 × 255 × 455 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley D210\/8\/24 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends on the respective air consumption.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley D210\/8\/24 an 8-bar compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The maximum pressure of the Stanley D210\/8\/24 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does the air intake capacity of 222 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe air intake capacity refers to the amount of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery volume available to a pneumatic tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley D210\/8\/24?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley D210\/8\/24 verfügt über einen 24-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley D210\/8\/24 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 222 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley D210\/8\/24?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl des Kompressors beträgt 2850 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley D210\/8\/24?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 570 × 255 × 455 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley D210\/8\/24 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley D210\/8\/24 ein 8-bar-Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der maximale Druck des Stanley D210\/8\/24 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 222 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrdering the Stanley Compressor D210\/8\/24\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley D210\/8\/24\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a 24-liter tank with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW output, 8 bar maximum pressure, and 222 l\/min air intake capacity. It thus offers a versatile compressed air solution for various tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e The decisive factor in choosing a compressor is not just the maximum pressure. Also check the air consumption of the desired pneumatic tool and compare it with the actual delivery volume available from the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155508711771,"sku":"9.292","price":249.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-D210_8_24.jpg?v=1790087872"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-new-vento-dn200-8-6","title":"Stanley Compressor New Vento DN200\/8\/6 | 6 l, 8 bar","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact 1.5 HP compressor with 6-liter tank and 8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact compressed air compressor with a \u003cstrong\u003e6-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP (1.1 kW)\u003c\/strong\u003e power, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air intake capacity of 180 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops, trade, and DIY projects.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact and powerful:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 combines a \u003cstrong\u003e6-l tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, up to \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and \u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e. It operates via a 230 V connection.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 6-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/strong\u003e features a 6-liter compressed air tank. The tank stores the compressed air generated by the compressor, thereby providing a volume of air for connected applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its relatively small tank, this model is particularly interesting for applications where a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e is required. The maximum pressure is 8 bar.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e6-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e180 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 achieves a stated \u003cstrong\u003eair intake capacity of 180 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the compressor suitable for various compressed air tasks, provided the air requirements of the respective tool match the actual available output of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant for pneumatic tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e The air intake capacity of 180 l\/min is not identical to the effective delivery rate. Therefore, the actual air requirement of a pneumatic tool should always be taken into account when choosing one.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor is equipped with a motor that has a power output of \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP or 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor operates on \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a speed of 3400 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis allows the Stanley compressor to be easily operated via a standard 230 V connection.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/strong\u003e reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. This value is crucial for selecting suitable pneumatic tools and applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to the maximum pressure, the air volume required by the connected tool should be considered in particular.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 has a compact design. The 6-liter tank and the compact form factor make the model interesting for users looking for a space-saving compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e6 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir intake capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for various applications with moderate air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e in need of a compact compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e with corresponding compressed air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar compressor with 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers who value a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact design\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley compressor at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e6-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for compressed air\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW motor power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e180 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e of 355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various compressed air applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 features a 6-liter compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley compressor have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 1.5 HP or 1.1 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the air intake capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated air intake capacity is 180 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley New Vento require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated speed of the compressor is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 355 × 315 × 370 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops, trade, and DIY. Which specific pneumatic tools can be used depends on the respective air requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley New Vento an 8 bar compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The maximum pressure of the Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does the air intake capacity of 180 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe air intake capacity refers to the amount of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery rate available to a pneumatic tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 verfügt über einen 6-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 1,5 PS beziehungsweise 1,1 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 180 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley New Vento?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl des Kompressors beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 355 × 315 × 370 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt, Handwerk und beim Heimwerken. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley New Vento ein 8-bar-Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der maximale Druck des Stanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 180 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrdering the Stanley Compressor New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley New Vento DN200\/8\/6\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a compact 6-liter tank with 1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW power, 8 bar maximum pressure, and 180 l\/min air intake capacity. It thus offers a space-saving compressed air solution for various tasks in workshops, trade, and DIY.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing a compressor, pay attention to more than just the maximum pressure. The air requirement of the pneumatic tool being used is also decisive. Therefore, compare this with the actual delivery capacity available from the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155514610011,"sku":"9.293","price":169.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-DN200_8_6.jpg?v=1790087877"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-dn55-8-5","title":"Stanley Compressor DN55\/8\/5 | 24 l, 8 bar, 222 l\/min","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP compressor with 24-litre tank, 8 bar and 222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e features a \u003cstrong\u003e24-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, a motor output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air displacement of 222 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowerful compressed air solution:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley DN55\/8\/5 combines \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e motor power with a \u003cstrong\u003e24-l tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, up to \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and an air displacement of \u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. It operates on 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 24-litre tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e is equipped with a 24-litre tank. The compressed air tank stores the air generated by the compressor, thereby providing a volume of compressed air for connected applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes the compressor suitable for numerous compressed air tasks. Whether a specific air tool can be used depends on the respective air requirements of the tool.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e24-litre tank capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith an air displacement of \u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley compressor offers a solid foundation for various compressed air applications. Together with the 24-litre tank, the unit is designed for different tasks in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e The specified air displacement of 222 l\/min is not equivalent to the effective delivery volume. Therefore, when choosing an air tool, its actual air requirement should always be considered.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley Compressor DN55\/8\/5 features a motor with an output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor is operated at \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a speed of 2850 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis provides a powerful basis for various compressed air tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. The maximum pressure is an important technical value when selecting the right air tool.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to the maximum pressure, the required air volume of the connected tool should be specifically taken into account.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe dimensions of the Stanley compressor are \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 255 × 590 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The unit thus offers a compact design with a tank capacity of 24 litres.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e24 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2850 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir displacement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e570 × 255 × 590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley DN55\/8\/5 suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e requiring a 24-litre compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable compressed air applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e with corresponding compressed air requirements\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar compressor with 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley compressor at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e24-litre tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for compressed air\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor power\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e222 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 570 × 255 × 590 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for various workshop and trade applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley DN55\/8\/5?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley DN55\/8\/5 has a 24-litre compressed air tank.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley compressor have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley DN55\/8\/5 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high is the air displacement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified air displacement is 222 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the Stanley DN55\/8\/5 require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the rotation speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed of the compressor is 2850 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley DN55\/8\/5?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are 570 × 255 × 590 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley DN55\/8\/5 is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade. Which air tools can be used specifically depends on the respective air demand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley DN55\/8\/5 an 8 bar compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The maximum pressure of the Stanley DN55\/8\/5 is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does an air displacement of 222 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAir displacement refers to the volume of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery volume available to an air tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley DN55\/8\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley DN55\/8\/5 verfügt über einen 24-Liter-Drucklufttank.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley DN55\/8\/5 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 222 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Stanley DN55\/8\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl des Kompressors beträgt 2850 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley DN55\/8\/5?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen betragen 570 × 255 × 590 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley DN55\/8\/5 eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley DN55\/8\/5 ein 8-bar-Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der maximale Druck des Stanley DN55\/8\/5 beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 222 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung bezeichnet die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem Druckluftwerkzeug zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Compressor DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley DN55\/8\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e combines a 24-litre tank with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW power, 8 bar maximum pressure, and 222 l\/min air displacement. It offers a versatile compressed air solution for various tasks in workshop and trade applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e The decisive factor in choosing a compressor is not only the maximum pressure. Also check the air requirements of the desired air tool and compare this with the compressor's actual available delivery volume.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155521360219,"sku":"9.294","price":169.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-DN55_8_5.jpg?v=1790087883"},{"product_id":"stanley-fatmax-kompressor-d211-8-24s","title":"Stanley Fatmax Compressor D211\/8\/24S | 24 l, 8 bar","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Fatmax Compressor D211\/8\/24S\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP compressor with 24-liter tank and 8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Fatmax Compressor D211\/8\/24S\u003c\/strong\u003e features a \u003cstrong\u003e24-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e, a motor output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e, and a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air intake capacity of 222 l\/min, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowerful compressed air:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S combines a \u003cstrong\u003e24-l tank\u003c\/strong\u003e with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW output, \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e, and an air intake capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. It operates on 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley Fatmax compressor with 24-liter tank\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compressor with a 24-liter compressed air tank. The tank serves to store the generated compressed air, thereby enabling a compressed air supply tailored to the respective application.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith its maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e, the compressor is suitable for numerous compressed air tasks. Which pneumatic tools can be used depends on the specific air consumption of the tool.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e24-liter tank volume\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e motor output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a specified \u003cstrong\u003eair intake capacity of 222 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley Fatmax compressor provides solid compressed air performance for various applications. The combination of air intake capacity and 24-liter tank makes the unit a versatile solution for workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImportant for tool selection:\u003c\/strong\u003e The air intake capacity of 222 l\/min is not equivalent to the actual effective delivery volume. Therefore, the specific air requirements of a pneumatic tool should always be considered when selecting it.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW motor output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor features a motor output of \u003cstrong\u003e2 HP or 1.5 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor is operated at \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a speed of 2850 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThis provides the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S with a powerful foundation for various compressed air applications in the workshop and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe maximum pressure of the \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Fatmax compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e is 8 bar. This value is an important reference point when choosing suitable pneumatic tools and applications.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor reliable operation, the air requirements of the connected tool should be aligned with the available performance of the compressor.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nDespite the 24-liter tank, the compressor's dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e570 × 255 × 590 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e are comparatively compact. This allows the unit to be stored in a space-saving manner in the workshop or at the intended place of use.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e24 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e2850 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir intake capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e222 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e570 × 255 × 590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e in need of a 24-liter compressor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e for suitable compressed air applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly and repair work\u003c\/strong\u003e requiring compressed air\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUsers looking for an \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar compressor with 230 V\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley Fatmax compressor at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e24-liter compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2 HP \/ 1.5 kW output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUp to \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e222 l\/min air intake capacity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e2850 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 570 × 255 × 590 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for numerous compressed air tasks in workshops and trade\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Fatmax Compressor D211\/8\/24S\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the tank of the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S features a compressed air tank with a volume of 24 liters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the output of the Stanley Fatmax compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor output of 2 HP or 1.5 kW.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the air intake capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified air intake capacity is 222 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the compressor require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S features a motor for 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the rotational speed of the compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed is 2850 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the Stanley Fatmax compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor dimensions are 570 × 255 × 590 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trade. Which pneumatic tools can actually be used depends on the specific air requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S an 8 bar compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The maximum pressure of the Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat does the air intake capacity of 222 l\/min mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe air intake capacity describes the amount of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not identical to the effective delivery volume actually available to a connected pneumatic tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Tank des Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S verfügt über einen Drucklufttank mit einem Volumen von 24 Litern.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Fatmax Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über eine Motorleistung von 2 PS beziehungsweise 1,5 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 222 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl des Kompressors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 2850 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley Fatmax Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen des Kompressors betragen 570 × 255 × 590 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret eingesetzt werden können, hängt vom jeweiligen Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S ein 8-bar-Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der maximale Druck des Stanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was bedeutet die Ansaugleistung von 222 l\/min?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung beschreibt die vom Kompressor angesaugte Luftmenge. Sie ist nicht identisch mit der effektiven Liefermenge, die einem angeschlossenen Druckluftwerkzeug tatsächlich zur Verfügung steht.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the Stanley Fatmax Compressor D211\/8\/24S\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Fatmax D211\/8\/24S\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact 24-liter compressor with 2 HP \/ 1.5 kW output, 8 bar maximum pressure, and 222 l\/min air intake capacity. It offers a versatile compressed air solution for various applications in workshops and trade.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing the right pneumatic tool, pay attention not only to the maximum pressure of 8 bar, but especially to its required air volume. This allows you to assess whether the compressor is sufficiently dimensioned for the desired application.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155528143195,"sku":"9.295","price":199.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Fatmax-Kompressor-D211_8_24S.jpg?v=1790087888"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-air-kit","title":"Stanley Air Compressor Kit | 1.5 HP, 8 bar, 180 l\/min","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStanley Compressor Air Kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact compressor with 1.5 HP and up to 8 bar pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor Air Kit\u003c\/strong\u003e offers an output of \u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP (1.1 kW)\u003c\/strong\u003e and reaches a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an air displacement of 180 l\/min and its compact dimensions, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact compressed air solution:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Stanley compressor operates with a \u003cstrong\u003e230 V motor\u003c\/strong\u003e, reaches up to \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e, and offers an air displacement of \u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. The dimensions are only \u003cstrong\u003e325 × 255 × 290 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStanley compressor with 8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith a maximum operating pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley compressor is suitable for numerous applications requiring compressed air. The output of 1.5 HP (1.1 kW) provides the necessary drive power for compressor operation.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW output\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz motor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 325 × 255 × 290 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpeed of 3400 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe Stanley compressor has an \u003cstrong\u003eair displacement of 180 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e. This provides a solid compressed air performance for various tasks. The maximum achievable pressure is 8 bar.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe stated air displacement describes the volume of air drawn in by the compressor. It is not to be equated with the actual output or effective delivery rate available to a compressed air tool.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u0026gt;\u0026gt;\u003ch3\u003ePowerful 230 V motor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe compressor is operated via a \u003cstrong\u003e230 V connection at 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e. The motor has an output of 1.5 HP (1.1 kW) and runs at 3400 rpm.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor workshops and trades:\u003c\/strong\u003e Thanks to the conventional 230 V connection, the compressor can be used for relevant compressed air tasks using a suitable power supply.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith dimensions of only \u003cstrong\u003e325 × 255 × 290 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Stanley Compressor Air Kit is designed to be compact. This makes it particularly suitable for users who need a space-saving compressed air solution.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMaximum pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eAir displacement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e325 × 255 × 290 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Stanley compressor suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e who need a compact compressed air solution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorkshops\u003c\/strong\u003e for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDIY enthusiasts\u003c\/strong\u003e with a need for a compressor up to 8 bar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobile applications\u003c\/strong\u003e where compact dimensions are important\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the Stanley Compressor Air Kit at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.5 HP \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/strong\u003e motor output\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eUp to \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e180 l\/min air displacement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e3400 rpm speed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact design measuring 325 × 255 × 290 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpace-saving solution for various compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the Stanley Compressor Air Kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much power does the Stanley compressor have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley compressor has an output of 1.5 HP (1.1 kW).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the maximum pressure?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure of the Stanley Compressor Air Kit is 8 bar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the air displacement?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated air displacement is 180 l\/min.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat power connection does the compressor require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor has a motor for 230 V at 50 Hz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the Stanley compressor have a tank?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe provided technical data does not specify a tank capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the Stanley compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions of the compressor are 325 × 255 × 290 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed of the compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stated speed is 3400 rpm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Stanley compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades. The specific compressed air tools that can be used depend on their respective air requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the compressor suitable for 230 V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The compressor features a 230 V \/ 50 Hz motor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow does air displacement differ from effective delivery rate?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAir displacement indicates the volume of air drawn in. The actual air delivery rate available at the compressed air tool may be lower due to various factors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Leistung hat der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley Kompressor verfügt über eine Leistung von 1,5 PS beziehungsweise 1,1 kW.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist der maximale Druck?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der maximale Druck des Stanley Kompressor Air Kit beträgt 8 bar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Ansaugleistung?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Ansaugleistung beträgt 180 l\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welchen Stromanschluss benötigt der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor für 230 V bei 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Hat der Stanley Kompressor einen Tank?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"In den vorliegenden technischen Daten ist beim Tank keine Tankkapazität angegeben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist der Stanley Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Abmessungen des Kompressors betragen 325 × 255 × 290 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Drehzahl des Kompressors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebene Drehzahl beträgt 3400 U\/min.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich der Kompressor?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Stanley Kompressor eignet sich für verschiedene Druckluftarbeiten in Werkstatt und Handwerk. Welche Druckluftwerkzeuge konkret verwendet werden können, hängt von deren jeweiligem Luftbedarf ab.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist der Kompressor für 230 V geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Kompressor verfügt über einen Motor mit 230 V \/ 50 Hz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie unterscheidet sich die Ansaugleistung von der effektiven Liefermenge?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Ansaugleistung gibt die angesaugte Luftmenge an. Die tatsächlich verfügbare Liefermenge am Druckluftwerkzeug kann aufgrund verschiedener Faktoren niedriger sein.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrdering the Stanley Compressor Air Kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eStanley Compressor Air Kit\u003c\/strong\u003e combines an output of 1.5 HP with a maximum pressure of 8 bar and an air displacement of 180 l\/min. Due to its compact dimensions, the compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in workshops and trades.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e When choosing a compressor, you should consider not only the maximum pressure but also the air requirement of the compressed air tool being used. The stated air displacement of 180 l\/min serves as an important technical reference value.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155537023323,"sku":"9.296","price":149.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-Air-Kit.jpg?v=1790087894"},{"product_id":"dachdecker-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Steinemann roofer's toolbox, 690 × 350 mm × 350 mm, 24 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Roofing Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive professional tool set for roofers and roofing work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Roofing Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e contains an extensive selection of tools for typical tasks in the roofing trade. Featuring a roofing hammer, brick hammer, roofing saw, ridge trowel, pry bar, slate axe, metal shears, and numerous other tools, this set provides versatile basic equipment for professional roofing work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFully equipped:\u003c\/strong\u003e The tool box combines specialized roofing tools with essential measuring, cutting, striking, and hand tools. The box measures \u003cstrong\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, is \u003cstrong\u003e350 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e, and weighs \u003cstrong\u003e24 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRoofing tool set for professional use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nRoofing work requires a wide variety of tools for processing, measuring, cutting, aligning, and fastening. This \u003cstrong\u003eroofing tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e has been compiled with a large selection of tools specifically suited for roofing tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoofing hammer\u003c\/strong\u003e and brick hammer for typical roof work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoofing ridge trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e for work in the ridge area\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoofing slate axe\u003c\/strong\u003e and roofing pry bar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoofing saw\u003c\/strong\u003e for sawing tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoofing felt knife\u003c\/strong\u003e and scoring knife for cutting tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFiber cement hole cutter\u003c\/strong\u003e and metal shears\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpirit level and carpenter's square\u003c\/strong\u003e for measuring and aligning\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eExtensive selection of additional hand and striking tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRoofing hammer, brick hammer, and lathing hammer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe equipment includes several important types of hammers for the roofing trade. The \u003cstrong\u003eright-handed roofing hammer\u003c\/strong\u003e has a length of 350 mm. It is complemented by a brick hammer with a 300 g head weight and a lathing hammer with a permanent magnet and a 600 g head weight.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nAdditionally, a plasterer's hatchet with a 600 g head weight is included. This provides a versatile selection of striking tools for various tasks.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecialized tools for roofing work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe tool box contains numerous tools specifically assembled for use in roofing work. These include a \u003cstrong\u003eroofing ridge trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e, roofing slate axe, roofing pry bar, roofing saw, a roofing felt knife, and a scoring knife.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor work on different materials, metal shears, a fiber cement hole cutter, and a utility knife are also included. A wrecking bar and pincers complete the set.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical roofing equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e From aligning and marking to cutting and processing, as well as striking and demolition work, the set contains numerous essential tools for everyday work on the roof.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for measuring and aligning\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor precise work, the \u003cstrong\u003eroofing tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e contains several measuring and marking tools. These include a 600 mm Asphalt A5 spirit level, a 600 mm carpenter's square, a 2 m wooden folding ruler, and a 5 m tape measure.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor marking, a chalk line reel with 30 m of line and blue chalk powder, as well as a carpenter's pencil, are provided.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for insulation and roofing materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nSuitable tools are also included for working with insulation materials and various roofing materials. The \u003cstrong\u003einsulation knife with a 280 mm blade length\u003c\/strong\u003e is intended for processing insulation boards. It is complemented by a roofing felt knife, scoring knife, and other cutting tools.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool bag and accessories\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nIn addition to the actual tools, the equipment also includes practical accessories. These include a \u003cstrong\u003enail and tool bag\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 1250 mm long belt, a cylinder padlock, and a hand-held roof broom.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nFor various manual tasks, adjustable wrenches, screwdrivers, chisels, pry bars, and a caulking gun are also available.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eComplete equipment of the roofing tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eVersion \/ Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRubber Grip Tape Measure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19 mm wide, 5 m long\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHacksaw with hand guard handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable wrench\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10\", length 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDefi Profi chalk powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e400 g, blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eChalk line reel \/ marking line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m, line Ø 1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMuller chisel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 20 mm, blade length 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInsulation knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFatMax slotted screwdriver\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 4, blade width 6.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMuller pry bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth 30 mm, length 290 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMortise axe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth 45 mm, length 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRoofing hammer, right-handed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRoofing slate axe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRoofing pry bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e470 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNail and tool bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 235 mm, height 275 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMüllerbar CMS wrecking bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 400 mm, width 45 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAsphalt A5 spirit level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic roofing ridge trowel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePainter's spatula, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal shears, right-handed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePincers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFiber cement hole cutter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFatMax slotted screwdriver\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 2, blade width 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRoofing saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 1250 mm, width 35 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBrick hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e300 g, handle length 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLathing hammer with permanent magnet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRoof broom \/ hand-held broom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth 160 mm, handle length 165 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRoofing felt knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFoldable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eScoring knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 × 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLyra carpenter's pencil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStabila wooden folding ruler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n  \u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e690 × 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n  \u003ctd\u003e24 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the roofing tool box suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoofers\u003c\/strong\u003e for professional roofing and repair work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpenters\u003c\/strong\u003e for measuring, marking, and woodworking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlumbers and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for cutting and assembly work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRenovation companies\u003c\/strong\u003e for work on roofs and building envelopes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional construction site teams\u003c\/strong\u003e needing a comprehensive tool set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the roofing tool box at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eExtensive \u003cstrong\u003eroofing tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e with numerous specialized tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eRoofing hammer, brick hammer, and lathing hammer included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eIncludes roofing ridge trowel, slate axe, and pry bar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eRoofing saw and various cutting tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTools for insulation materials and roofing materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSpirit level and carpenter's square for precise work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eIncludes nail and tool bag as well as a belt\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact tool box measuring 690 × 350 × 350 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTotal weight 24 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the roofing tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the Steinemann roofing tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box contains an extensive selection of roofing, carpentry, and hand tools, including a roofing hammer, brick hammer, lathing hammer, ridge trowel, pry bar, roofing saw, spirit level, carpenter's square, and numerous other tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the roofing tool set suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set is particularly suitable for typical roofing tasks as well as for various measuring, cutting, striking, and assembly work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a roofing hammer included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes a right-handed roofing hammer with a length of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a brick hammer included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The delivery includes a brick hammer with a 300 g head weight and a handle length of 350 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich tools are included for work with insulation materials?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn insulation knife (also known as an insulation board knife) with a blade length of 280 mm is included, among others.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich measuring tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes a 5 m tape measure, a 600 mm spirit level, a 600 mm carpenter's square, a 2 m folding ruler, and a chalk line reel with 30 m of line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a roofing ridge trowel included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool set includes a Classic roofing ridge trowel with a length of 190 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich cutting tools are in the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThese include a roofing saw, a roofing felt knife, a scoring knife, metal shears, a fiber cement hole cutter, and a utility knife.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big and heavy is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box measures 690 × 350 mm, is 350 mm high, and weighs 24 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a tool case or tool bag included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe delivery includes a nail and tool bag 235 mm long and 275 mm high. Additionally, a belt 1250 mm long and 35 mm wide is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist in der Dachdecker Werkzeugkiste Steinemann enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste enthält eine umfangreiche Auswahl an Dachdecker-, Zimmermanns- und Handwerkzeugen, darunter Dachdeckerhammer, Ziegelhammer, Latthammer, Firstkelle, Nageleisen, Dachdeckersäge, Wasserwaage, Zimmermannswinkel und zahlreiche weitere Werkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich das Dachdecker Werkzeugset?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set eignet sich insbesondere für typische Arbeiten im Dachdeckerhandwerk sowie für verschiedene Mess-, Schneid-, Schlag- und Montagearbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Dachdeckerhammer enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Im Set ist ein Dachdeckerhammer in rechter Ausführung mit einer Länge von 350 mm enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Ziegelhammer enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehört ein Ziegelhammer mit 300 g Kopfgewicht und einer Stiellänge von 350 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Werkzeuge sind für Arbeiten an Dämmstoffen enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten ist unter anderem ein Isolationsmesser beziehungsweise Dämmstoffplattenmesser mit einer Klingenlänge von 280 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Messwerkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält unter anderem einen 5 m langen Rollmeter, eine 600 mm lange Wasserwaage, einen 600 mm langen Zimmermannswinkel, einen 2 m langen Gliedermeter und ein Schlagschnurgerät mit 30 m Schnur.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Dachdecker-Firstkelle enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Werkzeugset gehört eine Dachdecker-Firstkelle Classic mit einer Länge von 190 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Schneidwerkzeuge gehören zum Set?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind unter anderem eine Dachdeckersäge, ein Dachpappenmesser, ein Ritzmesser, eine Blechschere, eine Faserzement-Lochschere und ein Universalmesser.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross und schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 690 × 350 mm, ist 350 mm hoch und wiegt 24 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Werkzeugkoffer oder eine Werkzeugtasche enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Zum Lieferumfang gehört eine Nagel- und Werkzeugtasche mit 235 mm Länge und 275 mm Höhe. Zusätzlich ist ein Gürtel mit 1250 mm Länge und 35 mm Breite enthalten.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the roofing tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWith the \u003cstrong\u003eSteinemann Roofing Tool Box\u003c\/strong\u003e, you receive an extensive collection of essential tools for the professional roofer. From specialized roofing tools and hammers to cutting, measuring, and marking tools, you have a versatile set of equipment for your everyday work.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Especially when working on changing construction sites, having the most complete tool set possible is very practical. With this tool box, many essential tools for roofing work are already bundled together.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155547640155,"sku":"9.275","price":1195.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Dachdecker-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann.jpg?v=1790087900"},{"product_id":"ofenbauer-werkzeugkiste-steinemann","title":"Stove builder's tool box Steinemann | 700 × 400 × 400 mm, 28 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSteinemann Stove Builder Tool Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensively equipped tool box for stove builders, tilers, and masons\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003estove builder tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e contains an extensive selection of tools for typical tasks in stove construction, tiling, masonry, and finishing work. Including trowels, squares, spirit levels, cutting tools, hammers, spatulas, and other hand tools, the box is curated for professional construction site use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eParticularly practical:\u003c\/strong\u003e The tool box contains over 40 individual tools and aids, providing a versatile basic kit for stove construction and related manual trades. The box measures \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, is \u003cstrong\u003e400 mm high\u003c\/strong\u003e, and weighs \u003cstrong\u003e28 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eComprehensive tools for stove construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBuilding and renovating stoves requires various tools for masonry, tiling, plastering, and installation work. This \u003cstrong\u003estove builder tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e combines numerous such tools in a single box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOver 40 tools and aids\u003c\/strong\u003e for various tasks on the construction site\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTrowels and spatulas\u003c\/strong\u003e for masonry, plastering, and jointing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpirit levels and squares\u003c\/strong\u003e for precise alignment and marking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTiling tools\u003c\/strong\u003e such as a rubber mallet, tiling pliers, and mosaic pliers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCutting and striking tools\u003c\/strong\u003e for various processing tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMeasuring and marking tools\u003c\/strong\u003e for precise work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKnee pads and other practical aids\u003c\/strong\u003e for use on the construction site\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for tilers and stove builders\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe kit is not limited to stove construction. Various tools are also suitable for \u003cstrong\u003etilers, masons, and finishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e. These include, for example, tile and glass cutters, a tiling sponge, rubber mallet, notched trowel, pointing trowel, mosaic pliers, and tiling pliers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor masonry and construction work, the set includes a brick trowel, mason's hammer, plasterer's hatchet, club hammer, as well as various squares and striking tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSpirit levels and measuring tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool set includes several essential measuring tools for precise alignment and marking. These include two \u003cstrong\u003eAsphalt A5 spirit levels\u003c\/strong\u003e (400 and 600 mm long), a machinist's square with stop, a mason's and machinist's square (600 mm long), a bevel square, a folding rule, and a plumb bob with line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFor precise work:\u003c\/strong\u003e The combination of spirit levels, squares, bevel square, folding rule, and plumb bob enables measuring, aligning, and marking for a variety of tasks.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTrowels, spatulas, and tools for mortar and joints\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box contains various trowels and spatulas for working with mortar, plaster, and joints. These include a \u003cstrong\u003eBerner plastering trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e, a square-edge brick trowel, stucco iron, painter's spatulas, a pointing trowel, and a notched trowel with E8 tooth profile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe equipment is complemented by a silicone smoothing tool, a plasterer's cup, and a tiling sponge. This makes the set suitable for various detail and finishing tasks as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTiling and cutting tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor work with tiles and slabs, the set contains several specially designed tools. These include a \u003cstrong\u003etile and glass cutter\u003c\/strong\u003e, a tile rubber mallet, tiling pliers, mosaic pliers, and a tiling sponge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included tools facilitate various steps in the processing, aligning, and installation of tiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStriking and hand tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor heavy-duty tasks, various striking tools are included. These count a plasterer's hatchet (600 g head weight), a club hammer (1000 g head weight), a mason's hammer (600 g head weight), as well as cold chisels and point chisels with a 14 mm diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn adjustable wrench, universal knife, caulking gun, and other hand tools are also part of the equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eComplete tool kit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box contains the following tools and aids:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTool\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eVersion \/ Size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBerner plastering trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTile grouting sponges, foam rubber, soft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e240 × 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTin snips, straight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTrowel (Cat's tongue), Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePermanent marker Lyra Medium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's cup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 130 mm, height 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSilberschnitt tile and glass cutter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 135 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTile rubber mallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 2, head 110 × 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinist's square with stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 170 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMini spirit level 70T\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eClub hammer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 g, handle length 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCoconut hand brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKnee pads, plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBox type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco iron (plastering tool)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePainter's spatula, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e30 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePainter's spatula, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBrick trowel, square, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's and machinist's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 × 330 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCold chisel Muller, Carbone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 14 mm, length 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTiling sponge, extra quality, Ardex\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e170 × 115 × 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable wrench\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10\", length 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBevel square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 267 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePoint chisel Muller, Carbone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 14 mm, length 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-purpose marker, graphite, Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDiamond hand sanding block\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack, grit 120\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCaulking gun, type Stabil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 segments, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlumb bob\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight 300 g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlumb line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 20 m, Ø 1.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUniversal knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWater brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBristle length 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpirit level Asphalt A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpirit level Asphalt A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched trowel, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth profile E8, 280 × 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's hammer Hit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e600 g, handle length 350 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTiling pliers (potter's pliers)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead width 20 mm, length 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePointing trowel, Classic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSilicone smoothing tool Silifix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e140 × 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMosaic pliers, straight blade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e28 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the stove builder tool box suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eStove builders\u003c\/strong\u003e for installation, finishing, and tiling work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTilers\u003c\/strong\u003e for cutting, jointing, and laying work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMasons\u003c\/strong\u003e for masonry, alignment, and striking work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlasterers and tradespeople\u003c\/strong\u003e for various finishing works\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfessional construction teams\u003c\/strong\u003e who require an extensive tool kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages of the tool box at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eExtensive \u003cstrong\u003etool set for stove builders and tilers\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOver 40 tools and aids included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMany different trowels, spatulas, and tiling tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMultiple spirit levels and squares for precise work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eExtensive selection of striking and hand tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes measuring, marking, and cutting tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTool box size 700 × 400 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTotal weight 28 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the stove builder tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the stove builder tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box contains over 40 tools and aids, including trowels, spatulas, spirit levels, squares, tiling tools, hammers, cutting tools, measuring tools, and other hand tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat tasks is the tool set suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set is particularly suitable for work in stove construction as well as tiling, masonry, plastering, and various finishing work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre tiling tools included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Included are, among others, a tile and glass cutter, tile rubber mallet, tiling pliers, mosaic pliers, and a tiling sponge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich spirit levels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe scope of delivery includes a 250 mm mini spirit level as well as two Asphalt A5 spirit levels with 400 and 600 mm lengths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are, among others, a Berner plastering trowel, a square-edge brick trowel, a pointing trowel, and a steel notched trowel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big and heavy is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is 700 mm long, 400 mm wide, and 400 mm high. The specified weight is 28 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a lock included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A 40 mm cylinder padlock is included in the delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box also suitable for masons?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The equipment includes various tools suitable for masonry work, including a brick trowel, mason's hammer, plasterer's hatchet, club hammer, as well as various squares and striking tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich measuring and marking tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes a folding rule, carpenter's pencil, all-purpose marker, permanent marker, bevel square, squares, plumb bob, and plumb line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box suitable for professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe comprehensive compilation is aimed specifically at professional users in stove construction, tiling, masonry, and finishing trades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist in der Ofenbauer Werkzeugkiste enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste enthält über 40 Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel, darunter Kellen, Spachtel, Wasserwaagen, Winkel, Plattenleger-Werkzeuge, Hämmer, Schneidwerkzeuge, Messwerkzeuge und weitere Handwerkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Für welche Arbeiten eignet sich das Werkzeugset?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set eignet sich insbesondere für Arbeiten im Ofenbau sowie für Plattenleger-, Maurer-, Putz- und verschiedene Ausbauarbeiten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind Plattenleger-Werkzeuge enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Enthalten sind unter anderem ein Platten- und Glasschneider, Platten-Gummihammer, Plattenleger-Zange, Mosaikzange und ein Plattenleger-Schwamm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Wasserwaagen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Zum Lieferumfang gehören eine Mini-Wasserwaage mit 250 mm Länge sowie zwei Asphalt A5 Wasserwaagen mit 400 und 600 mm Länge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Kellen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind unter anderem eine Berner Putzkelle, eine kantige Maurerkelle, eine Fugenkelle sowie eine Zahnkelle aus Stahl.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross und schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste ist 700 mm lang, 400 mm breit und 400 mm hoch. Das angegebene Gewicht beträgt 28 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist ein Schloss enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Lieferumfang gehört ein Zylinderhangschloss in der Grösse 40 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste auch für Maurer geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Ausstattung umfasst verschiedene für Mauerarbeiten geeignete Werkzeuge, darunter Maurerkelle, Maurerhammer, Gipserbeil, Handfäustel sowie verschiedene Winkel und Schlagwerkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Mess- und Anreisswerkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Zum Set gehören unter anderem Gliedermeter, Zimmermanns-Bleistift, Alles-Schreiber, Permanentmarker, Schmiege, Winkel, Senklot und Senkelschnur.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist die Werkzeugkiste für den professionellen Einsatz geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die umfangreiche Zusammenstellung richtet sich insbesondere an professionelle Anwender im Ofenbau, Plattenlegen, Maurerhandwerk und Ausbau.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrder the stove builder tool set\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the \u003cstrong\u003estove builder tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e, you receive an extensive collection of essential hand tools for stove construction as well as tiling, masonry, and finishing work. The combination of trowels, spatulas, spirit levels, squares, cutting tools, and striking tools covers numerous typical work steps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Especially when working at changing job sites, having a complete set of tools is highly beneficial. With the numerous special and hand tools included, many typical tasks can be completed using just one single tool box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155557962075,"sku":"9.277","price":739.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Ofenbauer-Werkzeugkiste-Steinemann-1.jpg?v=1790087907"},{"product_id":"ofenbauer-werkzeugkiste","title":"Stove fitter's tool box | 700 × 400 × 400 mm, 15.5 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStove-builder's tool box 700 × 400 × 400 mm\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong class=\"h2-styles\"\u003ePractical stove-builder's box for tools, construction sites, and workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003etool box\u003c\/strong\u003e, with a size of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 400 mm, offers space for the organized storage and transport of tools and work materials. Weighing 15.5 kg, it is suitable for use in trades, on construction sites, and in workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGenerous size:\u003c\/strong\u003e Measuring 700 × 400 × 400 mm, the tool box offers a practical format for storing an extensive range of tools and can be used in a variety of ways in professional work environments.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for trades and construction sites\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA clearly organized \u003cstrong\u003etool box\u003c\/strong\u003e makes daily work on construction sites and in workshops easier. Tools and accessories can be kept in a central location and transported together to the job site as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a footprint of \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of 400 mm, this box provides a generous internal volume for accommodating tools and various work materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile in use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe box is suitable for various applications in \u003cstrong\u003etrades, interior construction, and on construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e. It can be used to store tools, accessories, and other work materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGenerous dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e of 700 × 400 × 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for storing and organizing tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePractical for \u003cstrong\u003econstruction sites, workshops, and trades\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for an extensive set of tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBox weight: \u003cstrong\u003e15.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e700 \/ 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e15.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this tool box suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 400 mm tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for tradespeople, fitters, construction companies, and workshops that want to store tools and work materials clearly in one place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to its generous size, the box offers sufficient space for an extensive selection of tools and accessories. This makes it particularly attractive for professional use, where many different work tools are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBenefits at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eGenerous \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 400 mm tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlenty of space for tools and work materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for construction sites, workshops, and trades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePractical solution for central tool storage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWeight 15.5 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box has a size of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 400 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified weight of the tool box is 15.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the tool box be used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe box is suitable for storing and organizing tools and work materials, for example on construction sites, in workshops, and in trade environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the box suitable for professional use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The generous size is particularly suitable for tradespeople, fitters, construction companies, and workshops that wish to store an extensive range of tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified dimensions are 700 × 400 mm with a height of 400 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much space does the box offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith external dimensions of 700 × 400 × 400 mm, the box offers a generous format for storing tools and work materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the box be used on construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Due to its size, the tool box is suitable for storing tools and work materials in trade and construction environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the box also suitable for a workshop?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The box can also be used in workshops for the organized storage of tools and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy tool box online\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 × 400 mm tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a practical way to store tools and work materials centrally. With its generous format, it is suitable for professional use on construction sites, in trades, and in workshops.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur expert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e If you have an extensive collection of tools, it is worth storing frequently used tools together. A sufficiently large tool box makes organization easier and ensures that important work equipment is quickly at hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Werkzeugkiste hat eine Grösse von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 400 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Gewicht der Werkzeugkiste beträgt 15,5 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür kann die Werkzeugkiste verwendet werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Kiste eignet sich zur Aufbewahrung und Organisation von Werkzeugen und Arbeitsmaterialien, beispielsweise auf Baustellen, in Werkstätten und im Handwerk.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich die Kiste für den professionellen Einsatz?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das grosszügige Format eignet sich insbesondere für Handwerker, Monteure, Bauunternehmen und Werkstätten, die eine umfangreiche Werkzeugausstattung aufbewahren möchten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat die Werkzeugkiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die angegebenen Abmessungen betragen 700 × 400 mm bei einer Höhe von 400 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie viel Platz bietet die Kiste?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mit den Aussenabmessungen von 700 × 400 × 400 mm bietet die Kiste ein grosszügiges Format zur Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Arbeitsmaterialien.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann die Kiste für Baustellen verwendet werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Werkzeugkiste ist aufgrund ihres Formats für die Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Arbeitsmaterialien im handwerklichen und baulichen Umfeld geeignet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich die Kiste auch für eine Werkstatt?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Kiste kann auch in Werkstätten zur übersichtlichen Aufbewahrung von Werkzeugen und Zubehör eingesetzt werden.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155567825243,"sku":"9.276","price":389.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Ofenbauer-Werkzeugkiste.jpg?v=1790087912"},{"product_id":"gipser-werkzeugkiste-uek-1-3-efz-holz","title":"Plasterer's tool box inter-company training 1-3 EFZ wood","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlasterer's Tool Chest – comprehensive professional tool set\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong class=\"h2-styles\"\u003eFully equipped tool case for plastering, rendering, and interior finishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThis comprehensive \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool chest\u003c\/strong\u003e contains a versatile selection of tools for plastering, rendering, renovation, and interior finishing work. With trowels, spatulas, planes, rubbing boards, saws, squares, brushes, and personal protective equipment, the case is equipped for numerous tasks on the construction site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMany tools in one case:\u003c\/strong\u003e The collection combines classic plastering tools with general hand tools, measuring tools, and personal protective equipment. With its dimensions of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 310 mm, the case offers a compact solution for the professional working day.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlasterer's tool case for professional use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA well-equipped \u003cstrong\u003etool case for plasterers\u003c\/strong\u003e makes work on the construction site and during renovations easier. This case contains numerous tools required for applying, spreading, smoothing, and working with plaster and render.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eComprehensive tool equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e for plastering, rendering, and interior finishing work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVarious \u003cstrong\u003espatulas, trowels, floats, and rubbing boards\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlaster, facade, and white-plaster planes for various applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSaws, knives, squares, and screwdrivers\u003c\/strong\u003e for supplementary craft work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMeasuring tools such as folding rule and spirit level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFFP2 masks, hearing protection, safety goggles, gloves, and hard hat\u003c\/strong\u003e included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions with a total weight of 19.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eComprehensive equipment for plastering work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool case\u003c\/strong\u003e covers numerous typical work steps in the plastering trade. This includes tools for applying and smoothing materials as well as for working on corners, edges, and surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe scope of delivery includes, among other things, a \u003cstrong\u003estainless steel brick trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e, various plastering spatulas, a plastering pan, a notched trowel, and several floats and finishing trowels. This provides a wide selection for various tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePlanes and rubbing boards for surface finishing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe case contains various special tools for working on plaster, render, and insulation surfaces. These include an \u003cstrong\u003ealuminium plasterer's plane\u003c\/strong\u003e, a Surform standard plane, a facade plane with sandpaper, and various rubbing boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAlso included is a wooden white-plaster plane measuring 650 × 250 mm. The different tools allow for versatile processing of various surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMeasuring, cutting, and assembly tools\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the special plastering tools, the case also contains important general hand tools. These include a \u003cstrong\u003e2 m folding rule\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 600 mm spirit level, various squares, a handsaw, a utility knife, tin snips, as well as Phillips and flat-head screwdrivers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor smaller and special tasks, a goldsmith's shear, a set of key files, and a machinist's square with stop are also included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePersonal protective equipment included\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the tools, the tool case also contains various items for personal work safety. These include \u003cstrong\u003e10 FFP2 fine dust masks with valve\u003c\/strong\u003e, a headband hearing protector, safety goggles including a case, a work glove, and a white hard hat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe protective equipment complements the tool kit for work where dust, noise, or flying particles may occur. The respective protective products are to be used according to their intended application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIncluded tools and accessories\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTool \/ Accessory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eVersion \/ Dimension\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil, Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco tool \/ plaster tool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco tool \/ plaster tool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBricklayer's and machinist's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 500 mm, width 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTin snips, straight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner breaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHandsaw Jet Cut, fine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 450 mm, teeth 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaster cup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 130 mm, height 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet Two Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead weight 600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBrick trowel, square, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering pan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 150 mm, height 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula, cranked, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula, cranked, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering spatula \/ heart spatula, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal corner trowel, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 \/ 60 \/ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRadiator brush, Angel BS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e38 \/ 10 mm, bristle 51 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat brush, Aqua W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100 \/ 23 mm, bristle 76 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e170 \/ 115 \/ 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCleaning fleece, very fine, black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e130 \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's plane, alu\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 460 mm, width 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSurform standard plane, metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFacade plane, alu, with sandpaper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 \/ 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRubbing board with foam rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e210 \/ 135 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRubbing board, pointed, polystyrene\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e320 \/ 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing trowel, plastic, square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 \/ 140 mm, blade thickness 3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlaster saw \/ ceiling saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eToothing 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePhillips screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePH 3, blade length 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat-head screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 2, blade width 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat-head screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 4, blade width 6.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's jigsaw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel float with wide chamfer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 \/ 140 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing trowel, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 \/ 130 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFloat, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 \/ 130 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite-plaster plane, wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e650 \/ 250 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched trowel, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E 8, 500 \/ 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpirit level, Asphalt A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJapanese spatulas, set of 4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e50 \/ 80 \/ 100 \/ 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFine dust mask with valve 7920V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 pieces, FFP2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeadband hearing protector, flex band\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEN 352-2, SNR 24\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety goggles incl. case\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGlove N-Spector XRT\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 10, violet cuff\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHard hat Articap Roto\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eColour white\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGoldsmith's shear\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eKey file set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMachinist's square with stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 100 mm, width 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e700 \/ 400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e19.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact dimensions for everyday work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a size of \u003cstrong\u003e700 × 400 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and a height of 310 mm, the tool case has a compact design. The weight is 19.6 kg. Its dimensions make it a practical solution for tradespeople who want to combine extensive tool equipment in one case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the plasterer's tool case suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool case\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly suitable for plasterers, renderers, interior finishing companies, and professional tradespeople. The extensive selection covers numerous typical tasks in the plastering and interior finishing trade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe case also offers versatile basic equipment for renovations and conversions. Thanks to the combination of special tools and general hand tools, numerous work steps are possible with the existing equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBenefits at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eExtensive \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool case\u003c\/strong\u003e for professional work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMany different \u003cstrong\u003etrowels, spatulas, floats, and rubbing boards\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePlaster, facade, and white-plaster planes included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAdditional saws, knives, squares, and screwdrivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes \u003cstrong\u003espirit level and 2 m folding rule\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePersonal protective equipment including FFP2 masks, hearing protection, safety goggles, glove, and hard hat\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCompact dimensions of 700 × 400 × 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTotal weight only 19.6 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the plasterer's tool case\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the plasterer's tool case?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe case contains an extensive selection of plastering, rendering, and general hand tools. This includes, among other things, trowels, spatulas, floats, planes, rubbing boards, saws, knives, squares, brushes, and measuring tools as well as personal protective equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool case suitable for professional plasterers?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The compilation is geared towards typical tasks in the plastering, rendering, and interior finishing trade and contains numerous special tools as well as general hand tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich plastering tools are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are, among others, a brick trowel, plastering pan, plastering spatula, heart spatula, external corner trowel, floats, finishing trowels, notched trowel, plasterer's plane, white-plaster plane, and various rubbing boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre planes for plastering and facade work also included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The case contains an aluminium plasterer's plane, a metal Surform standard plane, an aluminium facade plane with sandpaper, and a wooden white-plaster plane.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a spirit level included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Included is an Asphalt A5 spirit level with a length of 600 mm and a profile of 50 × 21 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat protective equipment is part of the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are 10 FFP2 fine dust masks with valve, a headband hearing protector, safety goggles including case, a glove, and a white hard hat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the plasterer's tool case?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified weight of the case is 19.6 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the case?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe case has a size of 700 × 400 mm and a height of 310 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre general hand tools also included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In addition to the special plastering tools, the case contains, among other things, a utility knife, a handsaw, tin snips, screwdrivers, squares, a goldsmith's shear, and a set of key files.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the case also suitable for renovations?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The versatile combination of plastering, rendering, measuring, cutting, and assembly tools is also suitable for many renovation and interior finishing tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy plasterer's tool case online\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith this extensive \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool case\u003c\/strong\u003e, you receive versatile equipment for plastering, rendering, renovation, and interior finishing work. The combination of special tools, general hand tools, and protective equipment offers a practical all-in-one solution for the professional working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur expert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e An extensively equipped tool case saves time when preparing for construction sites and renovation work. The combination of plastering tools and supplementary hand tools is particularly practical, so many frequently used tools are directly available together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist in dem Gipser-Werkzeugkoffer enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Koffer enthält eine umfangreiche Auswahl an Gipser-, Verputz- und allgemeinen Handwerkzeugen. Dazu gehören unter anderem Kellen, Spachtel, Traufeln, Hobel, Reibscheiben, Sägen, Messer, Winkel, Pinsel und Messwerkzeuge sowie persönliche Schutzausrüstung.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich der Werkzeugkoffer für professionelle Gipser?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Zusammenstellung ist auf typische Arbeiten im Gipser-, Verputz- und Ausbauhandwerk ausgerichtet und enthält zahlreiche Spezialwerkzeuge sowie allgemeine Handwerkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Gipserwerkzeuge sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind unter anderem Maurerkelle, Gipserpfanne, Gipserspachtel, Herzspachtel, Ausseneckenspachtel, Traufeln, Glättekellen, Zahntraufel, Gipserhobel, Weissputzhobel und verschiedene Reibscheiben.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind auch Hobel für Gipser- und Fassadenarbeiten enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Der Koffer enthält einen Gipserhobel aus Aluminium, einen Surform Standardhobel aus Metall, einen Fassadenhobel aus Aluminium mit Schleifpapier sowie einen Weissputzhobel aus Holz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Wasserwaage enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Enthalten ist eine Wasserwaage Asphalt A5 mit einer Länge von 600 mm und einem Profil von 50 × 21 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Schutzausrüstung gehört zum Set?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind 10 FFP2-Feinstaubmasken mit Ventil, ein Bügelgehörschutz, eine Schutzbrille inklusive Etui, ein Handschuh sowie ein weisser Bauhelm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist der Gipser-Werkzeugkoffer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das angegebene Gewicht des Koffers beträgt 19,6 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Abmessungen hat der Koffer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Koffer hat eine Grösse von 700 × 400 mm und eine Höhe von 310 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind auch allgemeine Handwerkzeuge enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Neben den speziellen Gipserwerkzeugen enthält der Koffer unter anderem ein Universalmesser, eine Handsäge, Blechschere, Schraubenzieher, Winkel, eine Goldschmiedeschere und einen Schlüsselfeilensatz.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich der Koffer auch für Renovationen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die vielseitige Zusammenstellung aus Gipser-, Verputz-, Mess-, Schneid- und Montagewerkzeugen eignet sich auch für viele Renovations- und Ausbauarbeiten.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155577327963,"sku":"9.297","price":799.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gipser-Werkzeugkiste-_C3_BCK-1-3-EFZ-Holz.jpg?v=1790087918"},{"product_id":"gipser-werkzeukiste-uek-1-3-efz-kunststoff","title":"Plasterer's toolbox üK 1-3 EFZ plastic","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlasterer's tool case – comprehensive professional tool set\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong class=\"h2-styles\"\u003eFully equipped tool set for plastering, rendering, and interior finishing work\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThis comprehensive \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e contains a large selection of tools for plastering, rendering, renovation, and interior finishing work. Included are, among others, various trowels and spatulas, planes, rubbing floats, saws, squares, brushes, and essential protective equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEverything you need, right at hand:\u003c\/strong\u003e The set combines numerous tools for the daily work of plasterers and craftsmen with select personal protective equipment. Due to its extensive composition, it is particularly suitable for professional interior finishing and renovation work.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eComprehensive plasterer's tool set\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set has been put together for versatile \u003cstrong\u003eplastering and rendering work\u003c\/strong\u003e. In addition to classic tools such as bricklayers' trowels, finishing trowels, and plastering trowels, it also includes special tools for working on and smoothing gypsum and plaster surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtensive equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e with over 50 tools and accessories\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlastering and rendering tools\u003c\/strong\u003e such as finishing trowels, plastering trowels, spatulas, and rubbing floats\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePlanes and special tools\u003c\/strong\u003e for various processing tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMeasuring and testing tools\u003c\/strong\u003e such as a folding rule and spirit level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTools for cutting and assembly work\u003c\/strong\u003e such as knives, saws, and screwdrivers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePersonal protective equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e including FFP2 masks, hearing protection, safety goggles, gloves, and a safety helmet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust compilation\u003c\/strong\u003e for professional everyday work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIdeal for plastering and rendering work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included tools cover numerous typical tasks in  the \u003cstrong\u003eplastering trade\u003c\/strong\u003e. This includes applying, spreading, and smoothing gypsum and plaster, as well as working on edges, corners, and surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes, for example, a \u003cstrong\u003ebricklayer's trowel\u003c\/strong\u003e, various \u003cstrong\u003efinishing and plastering trowels\u003c\/strong\u003e, several plasterer's and Japanese spatulas, a notched trowel, a finishing plane, as well as various rubbing floats and planes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTools for precision work\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor measuring, adjustment, and assembly work, tools available include a \u003cstrong\u003e2 m folding rule\u003c\/strong\u003e, a 600 mm spirit level, various squares, screwdrivers, a handsaw, and other hand tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set is also equipped for smaller detail work. This includes, for example, jeweler's shears, a set of needle files, a locksmith's square with stop, as well as various knives and cutting tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eProtection and occupational safety\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the actual tools, the set also includes various items for personal occupational safety. These include \u003cstrong\u003eFFP2 fine dust masks with valve\u003c\/strong\u003e, headband hearing protection, safety goggles with a case, work gloves, and a white safety helmet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe included protective equipment complements the tool set for work where dust, noise, or flying particles may occur. The respective protective equipment must be used in accordance with its intended application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIncluded tools and accessories\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTool \/ Accessory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eDesign \/ Dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding rule, wood, Stabila\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 sections, length 2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCarpenter's pencil, Lyra\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUtility knife\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm, blade width 18 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco tool \/ Plaster tool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStucco tool \/ Plaster tool\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 15 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBricklayer's and locksmith's square\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 500 mm, width 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTin snips, straight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner cleaner\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHandsaw Jet Cut, fine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 450 mm, teeth 28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's cup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 130 mm, height 90 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's hatchet Two Line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHead weight 600 g, length 320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBricklayer's trowel, square, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's pan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 150 mm, height 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula, offset, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula, offset, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's spatula \/ Heart spatula, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade width 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal corner spatula, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 \/ 60 \/ 60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRadiator brush, Angel BS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e38 \/ 10 mm, bristle 51 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat brush, Aqua W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100 \/ 23 mm, bristle 76 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMason's sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e170 \/ 115 \/ 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel sponge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCleaning fleece, very fine, black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e130 \/ 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's plane, aluminum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 460 mm, width 85 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSurform standard plane, metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFacade plane, aluminum, with sandpaper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 \/ 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRubbing float with foam rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e210 \/ 135 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRubbing float, pointed, Styrofoam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e320 \/ 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering trowel, plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 \/ 140 mm, blade thickness 3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's saw \/ Ceiling saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eToothing 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePhillips screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePH 3, blade length 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSlotted screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 2, blade width 4 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSlotted screwdriver FatMax\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 4, blade width 6.5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlasterer's keyhole saw\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade length 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing trowel steel with wide chamfer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 \/ 140 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastering trowel, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e280 \/ 130 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing trowel, stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e500 \/ 130 mm, blade thickness 0.75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishing plane, wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e650 \/ 250 mm, thickness 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNotched trowel, steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTooth pattern E 8, 500 \/ 130 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpirit level, Asphalt A5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 600 mm, profile 50 × 21 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJapanese spatula set, 4-piece\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e50 \/ 80 \/ 100 \/ 120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFine dust mask with valve 7920V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e10 pieces, FFP2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeadband hearing protection, Flexband\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEN 352-2, SNR 24\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety goggles incl. case\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGlove N-Spector XRT\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize 10, violet cuff\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety helmet Articap Roto\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eColor white\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eJeweler's shears\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNeedle file set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLocksmith's square with stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLength 100 mm, width 70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e910 \/ 516 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e431 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e21.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the plasterer's tool set suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe comprehensive \u003cstrong\u003etool set for plasterers\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for professional craftsmen, plasterers, renderers, and finishing companies. The collection also offers a wide range of tools for various work steps in renovation projects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of classic plastering tools, general hand tools, measuring tools, and personal protective equipment is particularly practical. This eliminates the need to source many individual tools separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdvantages at a glance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eComprehensive \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e for numerous tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMany different \u003cstrong\u003espatulas, trowels, finishing trowels, and rubbing floats\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTools for gypsum, plaster, and facade work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAdditional planes, saws, squares, and assembly tools\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIncludes \u003cstrong\u003espirit level and folding rule\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFFP2 masks, hearing protection, safety goggles, gloves, and safety helmet included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eExtensive equipment for professional everyday work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the plasterer's tool set\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is included in the plasterer's tool set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set contains over 50 tools and accessories, including trowels, finishing trowels, spatulas, planes, rubbing floats, saws, squares, brushes, measuring tools, as well as personal protective equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the set suitable for professional plasterers?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The extensive collection is geared towards typical tasks in the plastering, rendering, and finishing trade and contains numerous specialized and hand tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich spatulas and trowels are included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIncluded are, among others, offset stainless steel plasterer's spatulas in 50 and 100 mm, a heart spatula with 150 mm, an external corner spatula, a bricklayer's trowel, as well as various finishing and plastering trowels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre there also tools for facade work included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The set includes, among other things, an aluminum facade plane with sandpaper as well as various rubbing floats and other tools for surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs a spirit level included in the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Included is an Asphalt A5 spirit level with a length of 600 mm and a profile of 50 × 21 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat protective equipment is included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe set includes 10 FFP2 fine dust masks with valve, headband hearing protection, safety goggles including a case, a glove, and a white safety helmet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the complete set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified weight is 21.6 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified dimensions are 910 × 516 mm with a height of 431 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre general hand tools also included?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In addition to plastering tools, items such as a utility knife, a handsaw, screwdrivers, tin snips, a file set, squares, and other tools are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the set also suitable for renovation work?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Due to the combination of various plastering, rendering, measuring, cutting, and assembly tools, the set is also suitable for many renovation and finishing tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy plasterer's tool set online\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith this comprehensive \u003cstrong\u003eplasterer's tool set\u003c\/strong\u003e, you receive versatile equipment for plastering, rendering, renovation, and interior finishing work. The combination of professional hand tools and protective equipment makes the set a practical all-in-one solution for everyday work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur expert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Extensive tool equipment pays off, especially for regular plastering and renovation work. With various trowels, spatulas, rubbing floats, and planes, you have the right tools available for different surfaces and work steps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist in dem Gipser-Werkzeugset enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Set enthält über 50 Werkzeuge und Zubehörteile, darunter Kellen, Traufeln, Spachtel, Hobel, Reibscheiben, Sägen, Winkel, Pinsel, Messwerkzeuge sowie persönliche Schutzausrüstung.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Eignet sich das Set für professionelle Gipser?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die umfangreiche Zusammenstellung ist auf typische Arbeiten im Gipser-, Verputz- und Ausbauhandwerk ausgerichtet und enthält zahlreiche Spezial- und Handwerkzeuge.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Spachtel und Kellen sind enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Enthalten sind unter anderem gekröpfte Inox-Gipserspachtel in 50 und 100 mm, ein Herzspachtel mit 150 mm, ein Ausseneckenspachtel, eine Maurerkelle sowie verschiedene Traufeln und Glättekellen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Sind auch Werkzeuge für Fassadenarbeiten enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Zum Set gehören unter anderem ein Fassadenhobel aus Aluminium mit Schleifpapier sowie verschiedene Reibscheiben und weitere Werkzeuge für die Bearbeitung von Oberflächen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist eine Wasserwaage im Set enthalten?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Enthalten ist eine Wasserwaage Asphalt A5 mit einer Länge von 600 mm und einem Profil von 50 × 21 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Welche Schutzausrüstung\n\u003c\/script\u003e\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155586928987,"sku":"9.298","price":819.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gipser-Werkzeugkiste-_C3_BCK-1-3-EFZ-Kunststoff.jpg?v=1790087924"},{"product_id":"stanley-kompressor-super-silent-dst100-8-6","title":"Stanley Super Silent DST100\/8\/6 | Oil-free air compressor 8 bar","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOil-free compressor 6 liters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact compressed air compressor with 8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThis compact \u003cstrong\u003ecompressor with a 6-liter tank\u003c\/strong\u003e operates oil-free and provides up to \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an intake capacity of 180 l\/min, a 230 V connection, and a noise level of 56 dB, it is suitable for a wide range of tasks in the workshop, garage, and on the construction site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil-free, compact, and powerful:\u003c\/strong\u003e The compressor features a 6-liter compressed air tank, 1.1 kW motor power, and a maximum operating pressure of 8 bar. Due to its compact design, it can be used in space-saving ways and is easy to transport.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKey advantages\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e6-liter compressed air tank\u003c\/strong\u003e for compact dimensions and versatile applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil-free technology\u003c\/strong\u003e for low-maintenance operation without compressor oil\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 8 bar maximum pressure\u003c\/strong\u003e for numerous compressed air tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e for a fast compressed air supply\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.1 kW power\u003c\/strong\u003e at 230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e56 dB noise level\u003c\/strong\u003e for comparatively quiet operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e of only 355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact 6-liter compressor for workshop and construction site\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e6-liter compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical solution when compressed air is needed but space is limited. The integrated tank holds 6 liters and supports a consistent supply of compressed air for various tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a maximum pressure of \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e and an intake capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e, the compressor is suitable for numerous typical compressed air applications. The 230 V connection allows for operation on a conventional power supply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOil-free compressor for low-maintenance operation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn important advantage of this air compressor is its \u003cstrong\u003eoil-free design\u003c\/strong\u003e. This means no compressor oil is required. This makes the device particularly practical for users looking for an uncomplicated and low-maintenance compressor for occasional or regular compressed air tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e8 bar maximum pressure and 180 l\/min intake capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressor achieves a \u003cstrong\u003emaximum pressure of 8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e. The intake capacity is 180 liters per minute. This provides sufficient power for many small and medium-sized compressed air tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact design and easy application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the compressor is particularly compact. This allows it to be used even where there is little floor space available. The 6-liter tank also contributes to its compact design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSuitable for\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWorkshop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral compressed air tasks and smaller applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGarage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompressed air tasks for vehicles and repairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction site\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact compressed air supply for mobile tasks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHobby and DIY\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eVarious tasks with compressed air\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e6 l\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 hp \/ 1.1 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e8 bar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIntake capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eNoise level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e56 dB\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOil-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the compressor suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eoil-free 6-liter compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly suitable for users who need a compact and uncomplicated air compressor for the workshop, garage, construction site, or DIY tasks. With its 8 bar maximum pressure and 180 l\/min intake capacity, it offers a good combination of compact design and performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the 6-liter compressor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the compressor's tank?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compressed air tank has a capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e6 liters\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much pressure does the compressor reach?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum pressure is \u003cstrong\u003e8 bar\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the compressor oil-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The compressor is \u003cstrong\u003eoil-free\u003c\/strong\u003e and therefore does not require any compressor oil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the intake capacity?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe intake capacity is \u003cstrong\u003e180 l\/min\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the compressor be operated from a standard power outlet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The compressor is designed for \u003cstrong\u003e230 V \/ 50 Hz\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow loud is the compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified noise level is \u003cstrong\u003e56 dB\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the compressor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e355 × 315 × 370 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eFor which areas of application is the compressor suitable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compact compressor is suitable for various compressed air tasks in the \u003cstrong\u003eworkshop, garage, construction site, and for hobby and DIY purposes\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much motor power does the compressor have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe motor has a power of \u003cstrong\u003e1.1 kW or 1.5 hp\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified speed is \u003cstrong\u003e3400 rpm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy an oil-free 6-liter compressor online\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf you are looking for a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact compressor with a 6-liter tank, 8 bar, and oil-free technology\u003c\/strong\u003e, this model offers a space-saving solution for many compressed air tasks. The combination of 1.1 kW power, 180 l\/min intake capacity, and 230 V connection makes it versatile in its application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e A 6-liter tank is particularly attractive if you are looking for a compact compressor for smaller compressed air tasks. For applications with a continuously very high air requirement, a compressor with a larger tank and higher air performance should be chosen instead.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54155684217179,"sku":"9.327","price":279.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Stanley-Kompressor-DN200_8_6_2a3c0ee5-6bf3-4eda-a19d-4f1cc079b81e.jpg?v=1790087987"},{"product_id":"werkzeugkiste-alu-riffelblech","title":"Aluminum tool box, checker plate","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAluminum Checker Plate Tool Box – Robust Transport Box for Pickups, Trailers \u0026amp; Loading Bays\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ealuminum checker plate tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e is a robust and practical storage solution for tools and equipment on \u003cstrong\u003epickups, loading bays, and trailers\u003c\/strong\u003e. The 3 mm thick checker plate construction is splash-proof and can be lifted with a forklift.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust tool box for mobile use:\u003c\/strong\u003e The tool box features a stable construction made of \u003cstrong\u003e3 mm thick checker plate\u003c\/strong\u003e, is splash-proof, and can be locked with a cylinder padlock.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box for pickup, trailer, and loading bay\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhether on the cargo bed of a pickup, on a trailer, or in a commercial transport environment: The \u003cstrong\u003echecker plate tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a practical way to store tools and equipment securely and clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith external dimensions of \u003cstrong\u003e1250 × 485 × 660 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the box offers a generous interior volume in a compact design. The internal dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e1170 × 400 × 550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust construction made of checker plate\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is made of \u003cstrong\u003e3 mm thick checker plate\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes it particularly suitable for use in areas where a robust and durable storage solution is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust construction:\u003c\/strong\u003e made from 3 mm thick checker plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSplash-proof:\u003c\/strong\u003e suitable for outdoor use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLockable:\u003c\/strong\u003e with cylinder padlock\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eForklift-friendly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the tool box can be lifted with a forklift\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile use:\u003c\/strong\u003e for pickups, loading bays, and trailers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly required:\u003c\/strong\u003e delivered unassembled, assembly instructions included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSplash-proof tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003esplash-proof design\u003c\/strong\u003e makes the tool box particularly attractive for use on vehicles and trailers. Tools and equipment can thus be kept protected and organized.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical for transport:\u003c\/strong\u003e The tool box is suitable for pickups, loading bays, and trailers and can be lifted with a forklift if required.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLockable tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box can be \u003cstrong\u003elocked with a cylinder padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows for controlled access to the tools and equipment stored in the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool box with large storage space\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith an external dimension of \u003cstrong\u003e1250 × 485 × 660 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e and an internal dimension of \u003cstrong\u003e1170 × 400 × 550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the box provides plenty of space for tools, accessories, and other equipment. At the same time, the design remains suitable for mounting on loading bays and trailers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal dimensions (W × D × H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 × 485 × 660 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1170 × 400 × 550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eChecker plate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e33 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDesign\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSplash-proof\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLocking\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLockable with cylinder padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUnassembled, assembly with instructions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eAdvantage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePickup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePractical storage of tools and equipment on the cargo bed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoading bays\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRobust tool storage for mobile use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTrailer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAdditional storage space for tools and accessories\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCommercial use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable for the clear storage of work materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDelivery and assembly\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is delivered \u003cstrong\u003eunassembled\u003c\/strong\u003e. Assembly instructions are included in the scope of delivery and allow for assembly before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGood to know:\u003c\/strong\u003e With a weight of just \u003cstrong\u003e33 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and compact dimensions, the tool box can be used in a variety of ways on vehicles, loading bays, and trailers.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the checker plate tool box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the tool box made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is made of \u003cstrong\u003echecker plate with a material thickness of 3 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box splash-proof?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is \u003cstrong\u003esplash-proof\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it suitable for use on vehicles and trailers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be locked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box can be locked with a \u003cstrong\u003ecylinder padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the tool box be lifted with a forklift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The tool box is designed so that it \u003cstrong\u003ecan be lifted with a forklift\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhere can the tool box be used?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003epickups, loading bays, and trailers\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the dimensions of the tool box?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe external dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e1250 × 485 × 660 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The internal dimensions are \u003cstrong\u003e1170 × 400 × 550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the tool box weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tool box weighs \u003cstrong\u003e33 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box delivered assembled?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The tool box is delivered \u003cstrong\u003eunassembled\u003c\/strong\u003e. Assembly instructions are provided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow thick is the checker plate?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe checker plate has a \u003cstrong\u003ematerial thickness of 3 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the tool box suitable for commercial use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe robust construction made of 3 mm thick checker plate and its suitability for pickups, loading bays, and trailers make it a practical solution for mobile tool transport and equipment storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy aluminum tool box at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003echecker plate tool box\u003c\/strong\u003e combines robust construction, practical storage space, and versatile application options. With 3 mm thick checker plate, splash protection, lockable design, and forklift compatibility, it is a practical solution for \u003cstrong\u003epickups, loading bays, and trailers\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e If tools and equipment are regularly transported with a vehicle or trailer, a dedicated tool box ensures better organization and a protected storage location directly at the point of use.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156177604955,"sku":"9.504","price":319.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Werkzeugkiste-Alu-Riffelblech.jpg?v=1790088337"},{"product_id":"planhaus","title":"Floor plan house","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBlueprint Cabinet with Tool Storage – Galvanized Steel Construction\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRobust blueprint cabinet with tool storage, blueprint pocket, and 4 crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool storage\u003c\/strong\u003e is a robust and practical solution for the secure storage of construction plans, tools, and other site equipment. The stable, galvanized \u003cstrong\u003esteel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for demanding use on construction sites. The blueprint cabinet features an integrated blueprint pocket, four crane hooks, and a lockable lid and tool cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith its compact dimensions, the blueprint cabinet offers a space-saving way to store important documents and work materials directly on the construction site. The \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized sheet metal side walls\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure a robust design, while the rear wall made of transparent plastic allows for easy visual inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical for construction sites:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe blueprint cabinet combines a stable steel construction with a lockable tool cabinet, blueprint pocket, and four crane hooks. This makes it easy to transport and provides a practical storage option for construction plans and tools directly at the point of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe main advantages of the blueprint cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e – solid design for use on construction sites.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanized surface\u003c\/strong\u003e – steel construction and side walls are galvanized.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated blueprint pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e – practical storage for construction plans and documents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e4 crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e – enables easy transport and relocation using a crane.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLockable cabinet lid\u003c\/strong\u003e – can be secured with a padlock.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLockable tool cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e – tools and accessories can be stored securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTransparent rear wall\u003c\/strong\u003e – rear wall made of transparent plastic for better visibility.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e – blueprint cabinet and cabinet floor can each be loaded with up to 100 kg.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBlueprint cabinet for construction sites and building companies\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eOn construction sites, construction plans, tools, and smaller work materials often need to be available directly at the point of use. At the same time, these items must be protected and stored securely. The \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool storage\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a compact and robust solution for this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stable construction made of \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly suitable for regular use on construction sites. Thanks to the four crane hooks, the cabinet can be easily moved using suitable lifting equipment. This allows for flexible use at different locations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdeal for construction site use:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe blueprint cabinet is particularly suitable for construction companies, craft businesses, site managers, and construction sites where construction plans, tools, and accessories need to be stored centrally and protected.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIntegrated blueprint pocket for construction plans\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eA major advantage of the cabinet is the \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated blueprint pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e. Construction plans and other important documents can be stored directly at the point of use, making them quickly accessible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of the blueprint cabinet and tool storage allows for clear organization of various work materials. While the pocket is intended for plans and documents, the tool cabinet offers additional storage space for tools and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool cabinet with lockable storage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated \u003cstrong\u003etool cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e creates additional storage space for tools, consumables, and smaller site utensils. Both the tool cabinet and the blueprint cabinet lid can be \u003cstrong\u003elocked with a padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows stored materials to be better secured against unauthorized access when not in use. A suitable padlock is not included in the delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust galvanized steel construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is manufactured from a \u003cstrong\u003esolid, galvanized steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e. The side walls are also made of galvanized sheet metal. The design is therefore optimized for robust use in the construction site environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear wall is made of \u003cstrong\u003etransparent plastic\u003c\/strong\u003e. This enables better visual inspection and distinguishes the cabinet from fully enclosed storage solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEasy transport with 4 crane hooks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the \u003cstrong\u003efour integrated crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e, the cabinet can be transported and positioned on the construction site using a suitable crane or lifting device. This makes it easier to move the 132 kg cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eDuring transport, applicable safety regulations and the permissible load capacity of the lifting equipment used must be observed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLoad-bearing floor for tools and materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth the \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet floor and the tool cabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e can be loaded with up to 100 kg each. This provides sufficient load capacity for tools, accessories, and other work materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum load capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTool cabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications of the blueprint cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × D)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1135 × 950 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial of construction\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel construction, galvanized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSide walls\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized sheet metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRear wall\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e132 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCrane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. load capacity 100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTool cabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. load capacity 100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet lid and tool cabinet prepared for padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool storage\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for various areas in the construction and trade sectors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eAdvantages\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSecure and central storage of construction plans, tools, and accessories.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction companies\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePractical solution for organizing documents and work materials.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCraft businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAdditional storage space for tools and site accessories.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStructural and civil engineering\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRobust construction and easy transport with crane hooks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSite facilities\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact storage solution directly at the point of use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the blueprint cabinet suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool storage\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly interesting for companies and specialist firms that require a robust and flexible storage option for construction plans, tools, and accessories on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEspecially suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nConstruction companies, craft businesses, site managers, installation companies, and construction sites where construction plans and tools need to be stored clearly and securely at the point of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the blueprint cabinet with tool storage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the blueprint cabinet with tool storage used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is used for storing construction plans, tools, and other site equipment. Thanks to the integrated blueprint pocket and tool cabinet, various materials can be kept organized at the point of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the blueprint cabinet have a tool storage section?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The cabinet has an integrated tool cabinet, which provides additional storage space for tools and site equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the blueprint cabinet be locked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Both the cabinet lid and the tool cabinet can be locked with a padlock. A padlock is not included in the scope of delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the blueprint cabinet have a blueprint pocket?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The blueprint cabinet is supplied with a blueprint pocket. Construction plans and other documents can be stored in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow can the cabinet be transported?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet has four crane hooks and can therefore be transported and positioned on the construction site using a suitable crane or lifting device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the blueprint cabinet made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet features a robust, galvanized steel construction. The side walls are made of galvanized sheet metal, and the rear wall is made of transparent plastic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the blueprint cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet has a width of 1135 mm, a depth of 950 mm, and a height of 2000 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the blueprint cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet weighs 132 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the floor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth the cabinet floor and the tool cabinet floor can each be loaded with a maximum of 100 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the cabinet suitable for construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The robust galvanized steel construction, lockable sections, blueprint pocket, and four crane hooks make the cabinet particularly suitable for use on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy the blueprint cabinet with tool storage at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool storage\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a practical combination of storage for construction plans, tools, and site accessories. The galvanized steel construction, four crane hooks, integrated blueprint pocket, and lockable areas make it a versatile solution for professional construction site use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nIf construction plans and tools are regularly required directly on site, a central, lockable storage location offers significant advantages in terms of organization and accessibility. Thanks to the four crane hooks, the cabinet can also be flexibly positioned on the construction site.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird das Planhaus mit Werkzeugschrank verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus dient zur Aufbewahrung von Bauplänen, Werkzeugen und weiterem Baustellenzubehör. Durch die integrierte Plantasche und den Werkzeugschrank können unterschiedliche Materialien übersichtlich am Einsatzort aufbewahrt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Hat das Planhaus einen Werkzeugschrank?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Planhaus verfügt über einen integrierten Werkzeugschrank, der zusätzlichen Stauraum für Werkzeug und Baustellenzubehör bietet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann das Planhaus abgeschlossen werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Sowohl der Planhausdeckel als auch der Werkzeugschrank können mit einem Vorhängeschloss abgeschlossen werden. Ein Vorhängeschloss ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Verfügt das Planhaus über eine Plantasche?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Planhaus wird inklusive Plantasche geliefert. Darin können Baupläne und weitere Unterlagen aufbewahrt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie kann das Planhaus transportiert werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus verfügt über vier Kranhaken und kann damit mit einem geeigneten Kran oder Hebemittel transportiert und auf der Baustelle positioniert werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus verfügt über eine robuste, verzinkte Stahlkonstruktion. Die Seitenwände bestehen aus verzinktem Blech, die Rückwand aus durchsichtigem Kunststoff.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus hat eine Breite von 1135 mm, eine Tiefe von 950 mm und eine Höhe von 2000 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus wiegt 132 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Belastbarkeit des Bodens?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Sowohl der Planhausboden als auch der Boden des Werkzeugschranks sind jeweils maximal mit 100 kg belastbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist das Planhaus für Baustellen geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die robuste verzinkte Stahlkonstruktion, die abschliessbaren Bereiche, die Plantasche und die vier Kranhaken machen das Planhaus besonders für den Einsatz auf Baustellen geeignet.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156186190171,"sku":"9.505","price":1490.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Planhaus.jpg?v=1790088343"},{"product_id":"planhaus-ausziehbar","title":"Extendable plan cabinet","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExtendable plan station – height-adjustable for construction sites\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExtendable plan station with document pocket, 4 crane hooks, and height-adjustable plan surface\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station\u003c\/strong\u003e is a robust and flexible solution for storing and working on construction plans directly on site. The galvanized steel construction can be adjusted in height from \u003cstrong\u003e1185 to 1884 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, allowing for comfortable adaptation to various working situations. A side-mounted document pocket, four crane hooks, and the option to lock it with a padlock make this plan station especially practical for professional construction site use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe extendable plan station is particularly suitable for construction companies, site managers, and trade businesses that wish to store and work on construction plans clearly and directly on-site. The \u003cstrong\u003eheight-adjustable plan surface\u003c\/strong\u003e can be set to three different heights, allowing for flexible use on different construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlexible on the construction site:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe extendable plan station combines a robust galvanized steel construction with a height-adjustable plan surface. Thanks to the four crane hooks, it is easy to transport and position, while the lockable design better protects stored documents from unauthorized access.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe most important benefits of the extendable plan station\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtendable design\u003c\/strong\u003e – flexible height adjustment from 1185 to 1884 mm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable plan surface\u003c\/strong\u003e – three possible heights of 101, 109, and 117 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSide-mounted document pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e – practical storage for construction plans and documents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e4 crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e – enables easy transport and relocation with a suitable crane.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLockable\u003c\/strong\u003e – the plan station can be secured with a padlock.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e – solid construction for professional construction site use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanized finish\u003c\/strong\u003e – steel structure and side panels are galvanized.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTransparent back panel\u003c\/strong\u003e – back panel made of transparent plastic for better visual control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eExtendable plan station for construction plans\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eOn a construction site, plans often need to be available directly at the place of work. At the same time, large plan documents require a suitable space where they can be kept protected and organized. The \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station\u003c\/strong\u003e was developed specifically for these requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe extendable design allows for a variable working height. Depending on the desired setting, the \u003cstrong\u003eplan surface can be positioned at 101, 109, or 117 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the plan station to be flexibly adapted to the respective working situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEspecially practical for site managers:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe height-adjustable plan surface allows for working with construction plans directly on site. The side-mounted document pocket offers additional storage space for plans and documents.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeight-adjustable plan surface\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eA special advantage of the plan station is the \u003cstrong\u003eadjustable plan surface\u003c\/strong\u003e. The height of the surface can be set to three different positions: 101, 109, or 117 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe variable working height facilitates adaptation to different operating conditions. At the same time, the entire construction can be extended from \u003cstrong\u003e1185 to 1884 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003ePlan surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePosition 1\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e101 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePosition 2\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e109 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePosition 3\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e117 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDocument pocket for construction plans and documents\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station is supplied including a side-mounted document pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e. Construction plans and other documents can thus be stored directly at the plan station and are quickly available when needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe side arrangement allows for easy access without having to open or move the entire construction. This is particularly practical when plans are regularly needed during ongoing construction operations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust galvanized steel construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe plan station consists of a \u003cstrong\u003esolid, galvanized steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e. The side panels are also made of galvanized sheet metal. This makes the plan station designed for regular use in demanding construction site environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe back panel is made of \u003cstrong\u003etransparent plastic\u003c\/strong\u003e. This keeps the contents partially visible from this side, allowing for easier monitoring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEasy transport with 4 crane hooks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor transport, the \u003cstrong\u003eplan station features four crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e. It can be moved and positioned on the construction site using suitable lifting equipment or a crane.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a weight of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e100.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the plan station offers a robust construction while remaining suitable for use as mobile site equipment. During transport, the applicable safety regulations and the permissible load-bearing capacity of the lifting equipment used must be observed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLockable plan station for construction sites\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station can be locked with a padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e. This helps better protect the stored construction plans and documents from unauthorized access.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe padlock itself is not included in the scope of delivery. A suitable lock should be used for security according to individual requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the plan station\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × D)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1468 × 986 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1185 to 1884 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlan surface height\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e101, 109, or 117 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial of construction\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel construction, galvanized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSide panels\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized sheet metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBack panel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e100.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCrane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eClosure\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLockable with padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDocument pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSide-mounted, included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of application\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station\u003c\/strong\u003e can be used in various areas of construction and trade where plans are needed directly at the place of work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eBenefits\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePractical storage and processing of plans directly on-site.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction companies\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRobust and flexible solution for site equipment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSite management\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight-adjustable plan surface for comfortable use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCivil engineering\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eEasy relocation with a suitable crane via four crane hooks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTrade businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProtected storage of construction plans and documents.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the extendable plan station suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly suitable for professional users who wish to store and work on construction plans directly on the construction site. Thanks to the adjustable design, the working height can be flexibly adapted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEspecially suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nConstruction companies, site managers, architects on construction sites, trade businesses, and professional construction site facilities where construction plans need to be protected, organized, and available directly at the point of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the extendable plan station\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is an extendable plan station?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn extendable plan station is a mobile storage and workstation solution for construction plans on building sites. The construction can be adjusted in height from 1185 to 1884 mm and features a height-adjustable plan surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the plan station be extended?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe plan station can be set to a height between 1185 and 1884 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eTo which heights can the plan surface be set?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe plan surface can be set to three different heights: 101, 109, or 117 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the plan station have a document pocket?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The extendable plan station is supplied with a side-mounted document pocket. Construction plans and other documents can be stored in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the extendable plan station be locked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The plan station can be locked with a padlock. The padlock is not included in the scope of delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow can the plan station be transported?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe plan station has four crane hooks and can be transported and positioned on the construction site using a suitable crane or lifting device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the plan station made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe construction consists of galvanized steel. The side panels are made of galvanized sheet metal and the back panel of transparent plastic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the extendable plan station?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe plan station has a width of 1468 mm and a depth of 986 mm. The height is adjustable between 1185 and 1884 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the plan station?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe extendable plan station weighs 100.7 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the plan station suitable for construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The robust galvanized steel construction, four crane hooks, document pocket, and height-adjustable plan surface make the plan station particularly suitable for professional construction site use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy an extendable plan station at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eextendable plan station\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical and robust solution for the storage and handling of construction plans directly on site. The height-adjustable design, the side-mounted document pocket, and the four crane hooks ensure flexible use in a professional construction environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to the galvanized steel construction and the option to secure the plan station with a padlock, it is particularly suitable for regular use on construction sites and as part of professional site equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nIf construction plans are regularly needed directly on-site, an extendable plan station offers the advantage of combining storage and a work surface into one mobile solution. The variable working height also allows for flexible adaptation to different operating conditions.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist ein ausziehbares Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ein ausziehbares Planhaus ist eine mobile Aufbewahrungs- und Arbeitslösung für Baupläne auf Baustellen. Die Konstruktion lässt sich in der Höhe von 1185 bis 1884 mm verstellen und verfügt über eine höhenverstellbare Planauflage.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch kann das Planhaus ausgezogen werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus kann auf eine Höhe zwischen 1185 und 1884 mm eingestellt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Auf welche Höhen kann die Planauflage eingestellt werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Planauflage kann auf drei verschiedene Höhen eingestellt werden: 101, 109 oder 117 cm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Hat das Planhaus eine Plantasche?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das ausziehbare Planhaus wird inklusive einer seitlich montierten Plantasche geliefert. Darin können Baupläne und weitere Unterlagen aufbewahrt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann das ausziehbare Planhaus abgeschlossen werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Planhaus kann mit einem Vorhängeschloss abgeschlossen werden. Das Vorhängeschloss ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie kann das Planhaus transportiert werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus verfügt über vier Kranhaken und kann mit einem geeigneten Kran oder Hebemittel transportiert und auf der Baustelle positioniert werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Konstruktion besteht aus verzinktem Stahl. Die Seitenwände bestehen aus verzinktem Blech und die Rückwand aus durchsichtigem Kunststoff.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist das ausziehbare Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus hat eine Breite von 1468 mm und eine Tiefe von 986 mm. Die Höhe ist zwischen 1185 und 1884 mm verstellbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das ausziehbare Planhaus wiegt 100,7 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist das Planhaus für Baustellen geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die robuste verzinkte Stahlkonstruktion, die vier Kranhaken, die Plantasche und die höhenverstellbare Planauflage machen das Planhaus besonders für den professionellen Baustelleneinsatz geeignet.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156195266907,"sku":"9.506","price":1290.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Planhaus-ausziehbar.jpg?v=1790088348"},{"product_id":"planhaus-mit-werkzeugschrank","title":"Plan house with tool cabinet","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px 0;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBlueprint Cabinet with Tool Locker – Galvanized Steel Construction\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRobust blueprint cabinet with tool locker, blueprint pocket, and 4 crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e is a robust and practical solution for the secure storage of construction plans, tools, and other site equipment. The stable, galvanized \u003cstrong\u003esteel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for demanding use on construction sites. The blueprint cabinet features an integrated blueprint pocket, four crane hooks, as well as a lockable lid and tool locker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith its compact dimensions, the blueprint cabinet offers a space-saving way to keep important documents and work materials directly on the construction site. The \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized sheet metal side walls\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure a robust design, while the rear wall made of transparent plastic allows for good visual inspection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePractical for construction sites:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe blueprint cabinet combines a stable steel construction with a lockable tool locker, a blueprint pocket, and four crane hooks. This makes it easy to transport and provides a practical storage option for construction plans and tools directly at the place of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe most important advantages of the blueprint cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e – solid design for use on construction sites.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanized surface\u003c\/strong\u003e – steel construction and side walls are galvanized.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated blueprint pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e – practical storage for construction plans and documents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e4 crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e – enables easy transport and relocation with a crane.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLockable blueprint cabinet lid\u003c\/strong\u003e – can be secured with a padlock.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLockable tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e – tools and accessories can be stored securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eTransparent rear wall\u003c\/strong\u003e – rear wall made of transparent plastic for better visual inspection.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e – cabinet floor and locker base can each hold up to 100 kg.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBlueprint cabinet for construction sites and construction companies\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eOn construction sites, construction plans, tools, and smaller work materials often need to be available directly at the place of use. At the same time, these items need to be protected and stored securely. The \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a compact and robust solution for this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stable construction made of \u003cstrong\u003egalvanized steel\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly suitable for regular use on construction sites. Thanks to the four crane hooks, the cabinet can be easily moved with suitable lifting equipment. This allows it to be used flexibly at different locations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIdeal for construction site use:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe blueprint cabinet is particularly suitable for construction companies, trade businesses, site managers, and construction sites where construction plans, tools, and accessories need to be kept centrally and securely.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIntegrated blueprint pocket for construction plans\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eA key advantage of the blueprint cabinet is the \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated blueprint pocket\u003c\/strong\u003e. Construction plans and other important documents can be stored directly at the place of use and are therefore quickly at hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of a blueprint cabinet and tool locker enables a clear organization of various work materials. While the blueprint pocket is intended for plans and documents, the tool locker provides additional storage space for tools and accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTool locker with lockable storage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated \u003cstrong\u003etool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e creates additional storage space for tools, consumables, and smaller construction site utensils. Both the tool locker and the blueprint cabinet lid can be \u003cstrong\u003elocked with a padlock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the stored materials to be better secured against unauthorized access when not in use. A suitable padlock is not included in the scope of delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust galvanized steel construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blueprint cabinet is made of a \u003cstrong\u003esolid, galvanized steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e. The side walls are also made of galvanized sheet metal. The construction is therefore designed for robust use in the construction site environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear wall consists of \u003cstrong\u003etransparent plastic\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows for better visual control and distinguishes the blueprint cabinet from completely closed storage solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEasy transport with 4 crane hooks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith the \u003cstrong\u003efour integrated crane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e, the cabinet can be transported and positioned on the construction site using a suitable crane or lifting device. This facilitates moving the 132 kg cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eDuring transport, the applicable safety regulations and the permissible load capacity of the lifting gear used must of course be observed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLoad-bearing floor for tools and materials\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth the \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet floor and the floor of the tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e can each hold a maximum of 100 kg. This provides sufficient load-bearing capacity for tools, accessories, and other work materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum load capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to a maximum of 100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTool locker floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to a maximum of 100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data of the blueprint cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (W × D)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1135 × 950 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial construction\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel construction, galvanized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSide walls\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanized sheet metal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRear wall\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTransparent plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e132 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCrane hooks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e4 pieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCabinet floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. 100 kg load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTool locker floor\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. 100 kg load capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet lid and tool locker prepared for padlock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable areas of use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for various areas of application in the construction and trade sector.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eArea of application\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eAdvantages\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSecure and central storage of construction plans, tools, and accessories.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConstruction companies\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePractical solution for the organization of documents and work materials.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTrade businesses\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eAdditional storage space for tools and site equipment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBuilding construction and civil engineering\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRobust construction and easy transport with crane hooks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSite facilities\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact storage solution directly at the place of use.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the blueprint cabinet suitable for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly interesting for companies and specialist businesses that need a robust and flexible storage option for construction plans, tools, and accessories on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eParticularly suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nConstruction companies, trade businesses, site managers, assembly companies, and construction sites where construction plans and tools need to be stored in a clear and lockable manner directly at the place of use.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently asked questions about the blueprint cabinet with tool locker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003csection class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the blueprint cabinet with tool locker used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blueprint cabinet is used for storing construction plans, tools, and other site equipment. Thanks to the integrated blueprint pocket and the tool locker, different materials can be stored clearly at the place of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the blueprint cabinet have a tool locker?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The blueprint cabinet has an integrated tool locker that offers additional storage space for tools and site equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eCan the blueprint cabinet be locked?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Both the blueprint cabinet lid and the tool locker can be locked with a padlock. A padlock is not included in the scope of delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the blueprint cabinet have a blueprint pocket?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The blueprint cabinet is supplied including a blueprint pocket. Construction plans and other documents can be stored in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow can the blueprint cabinet be transported?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blueprint cabinet has four crane hooks and can therefore be transported and positioned on the construction site with a suitable crane or lifting device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the blueprint cabinet made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blueprint cabinet has a robust, galvanized steel construction. The side walls are made of galvanized sheet metal, the rear wall of transparent plastic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow big is the blueprint cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blueprint cabinet has a width of 1135 mm, a depth of 950 mm, and a height of 2000 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow heavy is the blueprint cabinet?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe blueprint cabinet weighs 132 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the floor?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth the cabinet floor and the tool locker floor can each hold a maximum of 100 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the blueprint cabinet suitable for construction sites?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The robust galvanized steel construction, the lockable areas, the blueprint pocket, and the four crane hooks make the blueprint cabinet particularly suitable for use on construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuy a blueprint cabinet with tool locker at Baustore\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eblueprint cabinet with tool locker\u003c\/strong\u003e offers a practical combination of storage for construction plans, tools, and site equipment. The galvanized steel construction, four crane hooks, the integrated blueprint pocket, as well as the lockable areas make it a versatile solution for professional construction site use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpert tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nIf construction plans and tools are regularly needed directly on the construction site, a central, lockable storage location offers clear advantages in terms of organization and accessibility. Thanks to the four crane hooks, the blueprint cabinet can also be flexibly positioned on the construction site.\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c!-- FAQ Schema --\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür wird das Planhaus mit Werkzeugschrank verwendet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus dient zur Aufbewahrung von Bauplänen, Werkzeugen und weiterem Baustellenzubehör. Durch die integrierte Plantasche und den Werkzeugschrank können unterschiedliche Materialien übersichtlich am Einsatzort aufbewahrt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Hat das Planhaus einen Werkzeugschrank?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Planhaus verfügt über einen integrierten Werkzeugschrank, der zusätzlichen Stauraum für Werkzeug und Baustellenzubehör bietet.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann das Planhaus abgeschlossen werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Sowohl der Planhausdeckel als auch der Werkzeugschrank können mit einem Vorhängeschloss abgeschlossen werden. Ein Vorhängeschloss ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Verfügt das Planhaus über eine Plantasche?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Das Planhaus wird inklusive Plantasche geliefert. Darin können Baupläne und weitere Unterlagen aufbewahrt werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie kann das Planhaus transportiert werden?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus verfügt über vier Kranhaken und kann damit mit einem geeigneten Kran oder Hebemittel transportiert und auf der Baustelle positioniert werden.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material besteht das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus verfügt über eine robuste, verzinkte Stahlkonstruktion. Die Seitenwände bestehen aus verzinktem Blech, die Rückwand aus durchsichtigem Kunststoff.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie gross ist das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus hat eine Breite von 1135 mm, eine Tiefe von 950 mm und eine Höhe von 2000 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie schwer ist das Planhaus?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Das Planhaus wiegt 132 kg.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Belastbarkeit des Bodens?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Sowohl der Planhausboden als auch der Boden des Werkzeugschranks sind jeweils maximal mit 100 kg belastbar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Ist das Planhaus für Baustellen geeignet?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die robuste verzinkte Stahlkonstruktion, die abschliessbaren Bereiche, die Plantasche und die vier Kranhaken machen das Planhaus besonders für den Einsatz auf Baustellen geeignet.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156205097307,"sku":"9.507","price":1990.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Planhaus-mit-Werkzeugschrank.jpg?v=1790088353"},{"product_id":"gabelhubwagen-2-5t-800mm-tandem","title":"Pallet truck 2.5 t, 800 mm tandem","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePallet truck 2.5 t, 800 mm tandem – compact and maneuverable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe hydraulic \u003cstrong\u003epallet truck with a 2500 kg load capacity and 800 mm fork length\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for the comfortable lifting, maneuvering, and transporting of heavy loads. Due to the compact fork length, it is particularly suitable for applications where a short and manageable design is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe most important advantages at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2500 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e for heavy loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e800 mm fork length\u003c\/strong\u003e for a compact design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLift range from 80 to 190 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEntry rollers\u003c\/strong\u003e for transverse pallet entry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolyurethane (PU) wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy load handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003elifting, maneuvering, and transporting\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFor handling pallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, and other heavy loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2.5 tons load capacity with a compact fork length\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 2500 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, this pallet truck is designed for transporting even heavy loads. The 800 mm long forks ensure a particularly compact design and can be advantageous in areas where longer forks might be obstructive during maneuvering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe hydraulic lifting mechanism allows the load to be raised within the specified lift range. This makes it easy to pick up and move pallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, and other heavy goods comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eManeuverable and manageable\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe compact \u003cstrong\u003efork length of 800 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e makes the pallet truck particularly attractive for transport tasks where a manageable shape is required. Steering wheels and fork rollers made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e enable easy load handling and support maneuvering in tight spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eentry rollers for transverse pallet entry\u003c\/strong\u003e expand the range of possible applications and facilitate the corresponding pickup of pallets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile application possibilities\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck is suitable for, among other things, the following tasks:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLifting and transporting pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMoving boxes and stacking crates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTransporting machinery and heavy goods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIn-house material transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eManeuvering loads in limited spaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTransport tasks in warehouses, operations, and workshops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2500 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLift range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 – 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e800 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOuter fork width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTurning circle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight extended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the 2.5 t pallet truck\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the pallet truck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck has a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 2500 kg or 2.5 tons\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 800 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The compact fork length is particularly suitable for applications where a manageable design is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the pallet truck lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe specified \u003cstrong\u003elift range is between 80 and 190 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The height in the extended state is 190 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the wheels made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe steering wheels and fork rollers are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e. This supports easy load handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the pallet truck suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003elifting, maneuvering, and transporting pallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, and other heavy loads\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the advantage of the 800 mm long forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e800 mm long forks\u003c\/strong\u003e allow for a compact design of the pallet truck. This can be practical, especially for transport and maneuvering tasks in limited spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Tragfähigkeit des Gabelhubwagens?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Gabelhubwagen hat eine Tragfähigkeit von 2500 kg bzw. 2,5 Tonnen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lang sind die Gabeln?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Gabeln haben eine Länge von 800 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch kann der Gabelhubwagen heben?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der angegebene Hubbereich liegt zwischen 80 und 190 mm. Die Höhe im ausgefahrenen Zustand beträgt 190 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Räder?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Lenkräder und Gabelrollen bestehen aus Polyurethan (PU).\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür eignet sich der Gabelhubwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Hubwagen eignet sich zum Heben, Rangieren und Transportieren von Paletten, Boxen, Stapelkisten, Maschinen und anderen schweren Lasten.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Was ist der Vorteil der 800 mm langen Gabeln?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die 800 mm langen Gabeln ermöglichen eine kompakte Ausführung des Gabelhubwagens und können bei Transport- und Rangieraufgaben auf begrenztem Raum praktisch sein.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156272370011,"sku":"9.522","price":299.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gabelhubwagen-2.5t-800mm-Tandem.png?v=1790088425"},{"product_id":"gabelhubwagen-2-5t-1150mm-tandem","title":"Pallet jack 2.5 t, 1150 mm tandem","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePallet Truck 2.5 t, 1150 mm Tandem – robust and agile\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003e\nThe hydraulic \u003cstrong\u003epallet truck with a 2,500 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed for lifting, maneuvering, and transporting heavy loads. With a fork length of 1150 mm, a load capacity of 2.5 tonnes, and robust polyurethane wheels, it is particularly suitable for flexible material transport in operations, warehouses, or workshops.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe key advantages at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2,500 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e for transporting heavy loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1150 mm fork length\u003c\/strong\u003e for versatile pallet transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifting range from 80 to 190 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEntry rollers\u003c\/strong\u003e allow for cross-entry into pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolyurethane wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy load handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eSuitable for \u003cstrong\u003emaneuvering in tight spaces\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eHydraulic design for \u003cstrong\u003elifting and transporting\u003c\/strong\u003e loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh-performance pallet truck for heavy loads\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nWhen pallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, or other heavy objects need to be moved, this \u003cstrong\u003epallet truck offers a load capacity of up to 2.5 tonnes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The hydraulic construction is designed for comfortable lifting and moving of loads, enabling flexible use in various work environments.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThanks to the \u003cstrong\u003eentry rollers for cross-entry into pallets\u003c\/strong\u003e, the pallet truck can also be used for corresponding pallet pick-ups. The combination of 1150 mm long forks and an outer fork width of 550 mm makes it a versatile transport device.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAgile and easy to handle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nEspecially when transporting heavy loads, good maneuverability is crucial. The \u003cstrong\u003esteering wheels and fork rollers made of polyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e support easy load handling and allow for maneuvering even in limited spaces.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\nThe pallet truck is therefore suitable for typical internal transport tasks where heavy loads need to be safely picked up, lifted, and moved over short distances.\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck can be used for the following transport tasks, among others:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTransporting pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eMoving boxes and stacking crates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eTransporting machinery and heavy loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eManeuvering goods in the warehouse\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eInternal material transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n  \u003cli\u003eLifting and moving palletized goods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n      \u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/thead\u003e\n\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2500 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eLifting range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003e80 – 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003e1150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eOuter fork width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003e–\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eRaised height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003e190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003eWheel material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n      \u003ctd\u003ePolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n    \u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the 2.5 t pallet truck\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the load capacity of the pallet truck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n    \u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck has a \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 2500 kg or 2.5 tonnes\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n    \u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eHow high can the pallet truck lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n    \u003cp\u003eThe stated \u003cstrong\u003elifting range is between 80 and 190 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The height in the raised position is 190 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the wheels made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n    \u003cp\u003eThe wheels are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e. This wheel material supports easy handling when maneuvering and transporting loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the pallet truck suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n    \u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for \u003cstrong\u003elifting, maneuvering, and transporting pallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, and other heavy loads\u003c\/strong\u003e in internal material transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eCan you maneuver the pallet truck in tight spaces?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n    \u003cp\u003eYes. The polyurethane steering wheels and fork rollers allow for easy load handling and assist in maneuvering even in confined spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch ist die Tragfähigkeit des Gabelhubwagens?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der Gabelhubwagen hat eine Tragfähigkeit von 2500 kg bzw. 2,5 Tonnen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie lang sind die Gabeln?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Gabeln haben eine Länge von 1150 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wie hoch kann der Gabelhubwagen heben?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Der angegebene Hubbereich liegt zwischen 80 und 190 mm. Die Höhe im ausgefahrenen Zustand beträgt 190 mm.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Aus welchem Material bestehen die Räder?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Die Räder bestehen aus Polyurethan (PU).\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Wofür eignet sich der Gabelhubwagen?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Er eignet sich zum Heben, Rangieren und Transportieren von Paletten, Boxen, Stapelkisten, Maschinen und anderen schweren Lasten im innerbetrieblichen Materialtransport.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Kann man mit dem Hubwagen auf engem Raum rangieren?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Ja. Die Lenkräder und Gabelrollen aus Polyurethan ermöglichen ein leichtes Lastenhandling und unterstützen das Rangieren auch auf begrenztem Raum.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156280070491,"sku":"9.523","price":329.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gabelhubwagen-2.5t-1150mm-Tandem-2.png?v=1790088433"},{"product_id":"gabelhubwagen-2t-1150mm-tandem-mit-waage-gross","title":"Pallet truck 2 t, 1150 mm tandem with large scale","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePallet truck 2 t, 1150 mm tandem with large scale – bright LED display\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eCarTech pallet truck with large scale display\u003c\/strong\u003e combines the practical transport of heavy goods with integrated weight measurement. With a load capacity of up to \u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, 1,150 mm long forks, and a \u003cstrong\u003e1.2-inch bright LED display\u003c\/strong\u003e, this pallet truck is ideal for internal goods and pallet transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe most important advantages at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e for heavy goods and pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated scale\u003c\/strong\u003e for weight measurement during transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.2-inch bright LED display\u003c\/strong\u003e for a clearly visible weight reading\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWeight display in 0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFork length 1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e for versatile pallet applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/strong\u003e for uncomplicated operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e for comfortable operation and precise lowering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePU wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy load handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRollers with grease nipples\u003c\/strong\u003e for targeted lubrication\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePallet truck with large scale and 2-tonne load capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e2 t pallet truck with large scale\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical transport solution for warehouses, logistics, shipping, and internal goods movement. With a maximum load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, even larger goods and heavy loads can be moved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated \u003cstrong\u003escale\u003c\/strong\u003e makes it possible to record the weight of the loaded cargo directly with the pallet truck. This allows transport and weight control to be combined in a single operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLarge and bright LED display\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis version features a \u003cstrong\u003e1.2-inch bright LED display\u003c\/strong\u003e. The weight is shown in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe easy-to-read display is particularly practical when the weight of the transported goods needs to be checked directly during internal goods handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eScale:\u003c\/strong\u003e The weight is displayed in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e via a \u003cstrong\u003e1.2-inch bright LED display\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1150 mm fork length and 2 t load capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a \u003cstrong\u003efork length of 1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the pallet truck is suitable for numerous pallet and transport tasks. The outer fork width is \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe lifting range is \u003cstrong\u003e85 to 175 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows suitable loads to be lifted and moved for internal transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaintenance-free hydraulics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/strong\u003e ensures uncomplicated operation. The hydraulic system is used to lift and lower the loaded goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e allows for comfortable operation and supports precise lowering of the goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePU wheels with grease nipples\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe wheels of the pallet truck are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e. The PU wheels support easy load handling and facilitate maneuvering during internal transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rollers are additionally equipped with \u003cstrong\u003egrease nipples\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows for targeted lubrication.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile application possibilities\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck with large scale is suitable for numerous applications where goods need to be moved and weighed at the same time. These include, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTransporting and maneuvering pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWeight control during goods handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInternal transport of heavy goods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUse in warehouses and logistics\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eShipping and goods preparation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePositioning and moving suitable loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen in use, ensure that the load is picked up securely and evenly on the forks and that the \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e is not exceeded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTandem pallet truck with large scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eScale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDisplay\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1.2-inch, bright LED display\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLifting range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e85 – 175 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOuter fork width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRollers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWith grease nipples\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the pallet truck with large scale\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can the pallet truck carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck has a maximum \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, or 2 tonnes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the pallet truck have an integrated scale?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The pallet truck has an \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated scale\u003c\/strong\u003e, which can be used to record the weight of the load directly during operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow large is the LED display?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck features a \u003cstrong\u003e1.2-inch bright LED display\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIn what increments is the weight displayed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight is displayed in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the pallet truck lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe lifting range is \u003cstrong\u003e85 to 175 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the wheels made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe wheels are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the hydraulic unit maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The pallet truck features a \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the grease nipples on the rollers for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rollers have \u003cstrong\u003egrease nipples\u003c\/strong\u003e that allow for targeted lubrication of the relevant components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhich areas of application is the pallet truck with scale suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck is particularly suitable for \u003cstrong\u003ewarehouses, logistics, shipping, and internal transport\u003c\/strong\u003e where heavy goods need to be moved and their weight recorded at the same time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156284658011,"sku":"9.524","price":1490.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gabelhubwagen-2t-1150mm-Tandem-mit-Waage-gross.png?v=1790088439"},{"product_id":"gabelhubwagen-2t-1150mm-tandem-mit-waage-klein","title":"Pallet truck 2 t, 1150 mm tandem with small scale","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePallet truck 2 t, 1150 mm tandem with scale – compact and precise\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eCarTech pallet truck with integrated scale\u003c\/strong\u003e combines practical pallet transport with an integrated weight display. With a load capacity of up to \u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and a display in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is ideal for moving and weighing goods and loads directly on-site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKey benefits at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e for heavy goods and pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated scale\u003c\/strong\u003e for determining weight during transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDisplay in 0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e for precise weight reading\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFork length 1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e for versatile pallet applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/strong\u003e for uncomplicated operation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e for comfortable operation and precise lowering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePU wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRollers with grease nipples\u003c\/strong\u003e for targeted lubrication\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePallet truck with scale and 2-tonne load capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003epallet truck with scale\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical solution for companies that not only want to transport goods but also record their weight directly at the point of use. With a maximum load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, even larger goods and heavy loads can be moved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated scale shows the determined weight in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the weight of the transported load to be checked directly with the pallet truck, without having to take the goods to a separate scale for every weighing process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIntegrated scale with 0.5 kg increments\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated \u003cstrong\u003escale\u003c\/strong\u003e is particularly practical for applications where the weight of goods needs to be recorded during internal logistics. The weight is displayed in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes the pallet truck suitable, for example, for use in \u003cstrong\u003ewarehouses, shipping, logistics, and internal goods traffic\u003c\/strong\u003e when transport and weight recording are to be combined.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1150 mm fork length for pallets and goods\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a length of \u003cstrong\u003e1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. With an outer fork width of \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, the pallet truck is designed for various pallet and transport tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe lifting range is \u003cstrong\u003e85 to 175 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows suitable loads to be lifted and moved for internal transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor uncomplicated operation, the pallet truck features a \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/strong\u003e. The hydraulics enable the lifting and lowering of the carried load and are designed for reliable use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eErgonomic handle for precise lowering\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic handle\u003c\/strong\u003e supports comfortable operation of the pallet truck. The goods or the lifted load can be lowered in a controlled and precise manner via the handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis facilitates the positioning of pallets and goods during daily internal transport in particular.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePU rollers with grease nipples\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rollers of the pallet truck are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e. The material supports easy and agile handling when moving loads. p\u0026gt;\n\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rollers are also equipped with \u003cstrong\u003egrease nipples\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows for targeted lubrication and simplifies the maintenance of the corresponding components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck with scale is suitable for numerous internal transport tasks. It can be used for \u003cstrong\u003elifting, weighing, maneuvering, and moving\u003c\/strong\u003e suitable goods and pallets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePallet transport in the warehouse\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMoving goods in logistics and shipping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWeight control directly during transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInternal transport of heavy goods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePositioning of pallets and loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen using it, ensure that the load is securely placed on the forks and that the \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e is not exceeded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePallet truck with scale, tandem\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eScale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLifting range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e85 – 175 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOuter fork width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial of wheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaintenance-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eRollers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWith grease nipple\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHandle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the pallet truck with scale\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can the pallet truck carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck has a maximum \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e or 2 tonnes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the pallet truck have an integrated scale?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The pallet truck features an \u003cstrong\u003eintegrated scale\u003c\/strong\u003e, which can be used to determine the weight of the load being carried directly during use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIn what increments is the weight displayed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight is displayed on the integrated scale in \u003cstrong\u003e0.5 kg increments\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the pallet truck lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe lifting range is \u003cstrong\u003e85 to 175 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the wheels made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe wheels are made of \u003cstrong\u003epolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the hydraulic unit maintenance-free?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The pallet truck has a \u003cstrong\u003emaintenance-free hydraulic unit\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are the grease nipples on the rollers for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rollers feature \u003cstrong\u003egrease nipples\u003c\/strong\u003e, which allow for targeted lubrication of the relevant components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eFor which areas of application is the pallet truck suitable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck is particularly suitable for \u003cstrong\u003ewarehousing, logistics, shipping, and internal transport\u003c\/strong\u003e where heavy goods need to be moved and their weight recorded at the same time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156288688475,"sku":"9.526","price":1290.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gabelhubwagen-2t-1150mm-Tandem-mit-Waage-klein.png?v=1790088446"},{"product_id":"gabelhubwagen-2t-1150mm-tandem-eco","title":"Pallet truck 2 t, 1150 mm tandem Eco","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePallet truck 2 t, 1150 mm Tandem Eco – robust and maneuverable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e2 t Tandem Eco pallet truck\u003c\/strong\u003e is a robust and compact entry-level pallet truck for comfortably lifting, maneuvering, and moving heavy loads. Its solid steel construction, low-maintenance compact hydraulics, and \u003cstrong\u003ePU steering wheels and PU fork rollers\u003c\/strong\u003e ensure easy and maneuverable load handling – even in tight spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe key advantages at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e for heavy pallets and loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003e1,150 mm fork length\u003c\/strong\u003e for versatile pallet applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e for daily use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow-maintenance compact hydraulics\u003c\/strong\u003e for reliable lifting and lowering\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft-lowering function\u003c\/strong\u003e for controlled and gentle lowering of the load\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePU steering wheels and PU fork rollers\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy load handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eManeuverable and compact\u003c\/strong\u003e for use in tight spaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLead-in rollers\u003c\/strong\u003e for cross-entry into pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePallet truck with 2-ton load capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e2 t pallet truck\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical transport solution for warehouses, operations, workshops, production facilities, and shipping departments. With a maximum load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is suitable for lifting and moving pallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, and other heavy loads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of a robust steel construction and compact hydraulics makes this pallet truck a versatile solution for everyday internal transport tasks. Emphasis was placed on simple operation, low maintenance, and excellent maneuverability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRobust steel construction and low-maintenance hydraulics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe solid \u003cstrong\u003esteel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e forms the basis for the robust design of this pallet truck. The compact hydraulic system is designed for long-lasting and low-maintenance operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWith a \u003cstrong\u003elifting range of 80 to 190 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e, pallets and other suitable loads can be lifted and moved for internal transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1150 mm fork length for versatile pallet applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e1,150 mm long forks\u003c\/strong\u003e are suitable for numerous common transport tasks involving pallets. The outer fork spacing is \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition, the pallet truck features \u003cstrong\u003elead-in rollers for cross-entry into pallets\u003c\/strong\u003e. This assists in picking up pallets from the side and allows the pallet truck to be used in a versatile manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePU wheels for easy load handling\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoth the \u003cstrong\u003esteering wheels and the fork rollers are made of polyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e. This material supports easy and maneuverable load handling and is particularly practical for use in tight spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of a compact design and PU wheels makes this pallet truck a suitable transport aid for warehouse and operational areas where frequent maneuvering and positioning are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSoft-lowering for controlled descent\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck is equipped with a \u003cstrong\u003esoft-lowering function\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows the lifted load to be lowered in a controlled and uniform manner, supporting comfortable handling during daily pallet transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eVersatile application options\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eTandem Eco pallet truck\u003c\/strong\u003e is suitable for numerous internal transport tasks. Typical areas of application include, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTransporting and maneuvering pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMoving boxes and stacking crates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTransporting suitable machinery and heavy loads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eGoods transport in warehouse and logistics areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInternal transport in production and workshop environments\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLoading, unloading, and positioning pallets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen using, always ensure that the load is evenly distributed on the forks and that the \u003cstrong\u003emaximum load capacity of 2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e is not exceeded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eTandem Eco Pallet Truck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLifting range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e80 – 190 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFork length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e1,150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eOuter fork spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft-lowering\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyurethane (PU)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid steel construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulics\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact hydraulics, low-maintenance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpecial feature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLead-in rollers for cross-entry into pallets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the pallet truck\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can the pallet truck carry?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck has a maximum \u003cstrong\u003eload capacity of 2,000 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e (2 tons).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow long are the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe forks have a \u003cstrong\u003elength of 1,150 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow high can the pallet truck lift?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe lifting range is \u003cstrong\u003e80 to 190 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the spacing of the forks?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe outer fork spacing is \u003cstrong\u003e550 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the pallet truck have a soft-lowering function?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the pallet truck is equipped with a \u003cstrong\u003esoft-lowering function\u003c\/strong\u003e, which allows loads to be lowered in a controlled manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material are the wheels made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003esteering wheels and fork rollers are made of polyurethane (PU)\u003c\/strong\u003e, which facilitates easy and maneuverable load handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat types of loads is the pallet truck suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe pallet truck is suitable for lifting, maneuvering, and moving \u003cstrong\u003epallets, boxes, stacking crates, machinery, and other heavy loads\u003c\/strong\u003e, provided they are suitable for transport via pallet truck.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat are lead-in rollers for cross-entry into pallets?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe integrated \u003cstrong\u003elead-in rollers assist with cross-entry into pallets\u003c\/strong\u003e, thereby expanding the pallet truck's application possibilities for various pallet positioning scenarios.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156291768667,"sku":"9.525","price":269.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Gabelhubwagen-2t-1150mm-Tandem-Eco.png?v=1790088452"},{"product_id":"treppenkarre-120kg-stahl-klappbar","title":"Folding steel stair climber 120 kg","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.product-description {\n  color: #333;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description h2 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-size: 2em;\n  margin-bottom: 8px;\n}\n\n.product-description h3 {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  margin-top: 32px;\n}\n\n.product-description strong {\n  color: #B61B1F;\n}\n\n.product-description .intro {\n  font-weight: 600;\n  font-size: 1.1em;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n  border-left: 4px solid #B61B1F;\n  padding: 12px 16px;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .highlight-box {\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n  border-left: 4px solid #1170AB;\n  padding: 16px 20px;\n  margin: 24px 0;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list {\n  padding-left: 22px;\n}\n\n.product-description .features-list li {\n  margin-bottom: 10px;\n  line-height: 1.5;\n}\n\n.product-description table {\n  width: 100%;\n  border-collapse: collapse;\n  margin: 20px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description th,\n.product-description td {\n  padding: 11px 12px;\n  border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd;\n  text-align: left;\n  vertical-align: top;\n}\n\n.product-description th {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  background: #f4f8fb;\n}\n\n.product-description a {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 600;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq summary {\n  color: #1170AB;\n  font-weight: 700;\n  cursor: pointer;\n  padding: 12px 0;\n}\n\n.product-description .faq-content {\n  padding: 0 0 12px;\n  line-height: 1.6;\n}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"product-description\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStair-climbing hand truck 120 kg steel foldable – quick-folding system\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"intro\"\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003efoldable steel stair-climbing hand truck\u003c\/strong\u003e is a versatile and easy-to-use transport aid for moving goods over stairs. Thanks to the practical \u003cstrong\u003equick-folding system\u003c\/strong\u003e, the hand truck can be folded and unfolded within just a few seconds. On level ground, it can transport loads of up to \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight-box\"\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe most important benefits at a glance:\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"features-list\"\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 120 kg load capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e on level ground\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSturdy steel construction\u003c\/strong\u003e for heavy-duty transport tasks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpecially designed for transport over stairs\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuick-folding system\u003c\/strong\u003e for folding and unfolding in just a few seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpace-saving foldable design\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it practical for storage and transport\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic safety handles\u003c\/strong\u003e for comfortable handling\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFoldable steel stair-climbing hand truck\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eCarTech stair-climbing hand truck 120 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e was developed for versatile transport tasks and is particularly suitable for moving goods over stairs. The sturdy \u003cstrong\u003esteel\u003c\/strong\u003e construction provides a resilient base for daily use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOn level ground, the hand truck can carry goods weighing up to \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. This makes it suitable for numerous transport tasks in businesses, warehouses, workshops, shipping, or during relocations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eQuick-folding system – ready for use in seconds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA particularly practical feature of this stair-climbing hand truck is the \u003cstrong\u003equick-folding system\u003c\/strong\u003e. It allows the hand truck to be folded and unfolded within just a few seconds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis quick folding facilitates daily handling and is especially practical when the hand truck needs to be stowed away to save space after use or taken along to the next job site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor transport over stairs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stair-climbing hand truck was specifically developed for \u003cstrong\u003etransporting goods over stairs\u003c\/strong\u003e. As such, it can be a practical aid when moving loads within buildings or during relocations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen transporting over stairs, the load should always be securely positioned and moved with control. The stated load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg applies to transport on level ground\u003c\/strong\u003e; when used on stairs, the specific operating conditions and safe handling must be taken into account.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eErgonomic safety handles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor comfortable and controlled operation, the stair-climbing hand truck features \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic safety handles\u003c\/strong\u003e. These assist in guiding the hand truck securely while transporting goods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSturdy steel construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stair-climbing hand truck is \u003cstrong\u003emade of steel\u003c\/strong\u003e and is therefore designed for heavy-duty transport tasks. The steel construction provides a stable base for transporting goods up to the stated load capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePractical for storage and transport\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to its \u003cstrong\u003efoldable construction\u003c\/strong\u003e, the hand truck can be stowed away to save space after use. The quick-folding system allows for exceptionally fast folding and unfolding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe combination of compact folding function, steel construction, and ergonomic safety handles makes this stair-climbing hand truck a practical transport aid for a variety of applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical data\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eStair-climbing hand truck \/ Hand truck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e120 kg on level ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eDesign\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFoldable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eQuick-folding system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eHandles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eErgonomic safety handles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eUse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd\u003eSpecially for transport over stairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFAQ – Frequently asked questions about the foldable stair-climbing hand truck\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq\"\u003e\n\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much weight can the stair-climbing hand truck transport?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stair-climbing hand truck has a load capacity of \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg on level ground\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the stair-climbing hand truck foldable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The stair-climbing hand truck is \u003cstrong\u003efoldable\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be folded and unfolded within just a few seconds thanks to the quick-folding system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow quickly can the hand truck be folded up?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to the \u003cstrong\u003equick-folding system\u003c\/strong\u003e, folding and unfolding takes only a few seconds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat material is the stair-climbing hand truck made of?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stair-climbing hand truck is made of \u003cstrong\u003esteel\u003c\/strong\u003e and is designed for heavy-duty transport tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the stair-climbing hand truck suitable for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe stair-climbing hand truck was specifically developed for \u003cstrong\u003etransporting goods over stairs\u003c\/strong\u003e. On level ground, it can transport loads of up to 120 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the hand truck have ergonomic handles?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The stair-climbing hand truck is equipped with \u003cstrong\u003eergonomic safety handles\u003c\/strong\u003e, which support comfortable and controlled handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"faq-accordion\"\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the foldable stair-climbing hand truck space-saving?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"faq-content\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Due to the \u003cstrong\u003efolding function\u003c\/strong\u003e, the hand truck can be stored away in a space-saving manner after use and is easy to transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Baustore","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54156295373147,"sku":"9.527","price":99.0,"currency_code":"CHF","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1035\/4435\/7211\/files\/Treppenkarre-120kg-Stahl-klappbar.jpg?v=1790088458"}],"url":"https:\/\/baustore.ch\/en\/collections\/workshop-equipment.oembed","provider":"Baustore.ch","version":"1.0","type":"link"}